{"title":"Building material","description":null,"products":[{"product_id":"protec-it-abdeckvlies-120-g-m-50-m","title":"PROTECT-IT floor protection fleece 120g\/m2 - 50 meter roll","description":"\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eArea of application\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eCovering dry floors such as parquet, laminate, carpet, tiles, synthetic floor coverings, etc. For protecting objects such as stairs with railings, furniture, windows, and doors. Do not use on freshly laid clay or porous stone tiles.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProperties\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003equick and easy to lay\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003enon-slip surfaces\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003ereusable\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eprotects against mechanical damage\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003efilm prevents the penetration of liquids such as water and paint\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eCarrier 100% polyester fleece\nSurface weight 120 g\/m²\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSupply form\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eRolls of 50 m\nWidth 100 cm\n\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e30 rolls \/ pallet\n\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eApplication\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eLay the covering fleece in strips with an overlap of approx. 5 cm. Tape them shut using suitable adhesive tape (e.g., concrete duct tape).\nFor multiple uses of the covering fleece, it must be clean. Preliminary tests are recommended for sensitive surfaces.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNotes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eThe information provided reflects the current state of development. It does not claim to be exhaustive. Professional and therefore successful application of the products is not under our control. A warranty can therefore only be assumed for the quality of the products, not for the application. It is the user's responsibility to determine the suitability of our products for their intended purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended. \u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154373890395,"sku":"9.019","price":53.75,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Abdeckvlies-120gm2-PROTECT-IT-50-Meter-Rolle-scaled.jpg?v=1790087043"},{"product_id":"abdeckvlies-160-g-m-blau-1-50-m-atmungsaktiv","title":"Breathable protective fleece - 50-meter roll","description":"\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eArea of application\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\nCovering dry floors such as parquet, laminate, carpet, tiles, synthetic floor coverings, and similar. For protecting objects such as stairs with railings, furniture, windows, and doors. Do not use on freshly laid clay and porous stone slabs.\n\n\u003cb\u003eFeatures\u003c\/b\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003equick and easy to cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003enon-slip surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003ereusable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003eprotects against mechanical damage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003efilm prevents the penetration of liquids such as water and paint\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\nBacking 100% polyester fleece\n\nVapour-permeable\n\nBasis weight 160 g\/m²\n\nColour: blue\n\n\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eDelivery form\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\nRolls of 50m\nWidth 100 cm\n24 rolls \/ pallet\n\n\u003cb\u003eProcessing\u003c\/b\u003e\n\nLay out the protective fleece in strips with an overlap of approx. 5 cm. Seal these tightly with a suitable adhesive tape (e.g. concrete fabric tape).\nFor multiple uses of the protective fleece, it must not be soiled. Preliminary tests are recommended for sensitive surfaces.\n\n\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eNotes\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\nThe information corresponds to the current state of development. It makes no claim to completeness. Professional and therefore successful processing of the products is beyond our control. A warranty can therefore only be assumed for the quality of the products, not for the processing. It is the user's responsibility to determine the suitability of our products for their intended purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended.\n\n ","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154382115163,"sku":"9.032","price":62.9,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/9.032-Abdeckvlies-Active-Bleu-Plus-1.jpg?v=1790087049"},{"product_id":"schutzvlies-1-50-m-rutschfestes-malersaugvlies","title":"9.038 Painter's Absorbent Fleece 220g\/m2 - 50 meter roll","description":"\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eNon-slip surface\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e100% removable without residue\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eAbsorbs large amounts of liquid\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eEasy to install on stairs, floors, etc.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ca name=\"_GoBack\"\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e \u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eSuitable for universal, repeated or long-term use on most indoor surfaces.\nThe protective fleece consists of an extremely durable non-woven fabric made of synthetic fibers.\n\u003c\/span\u003e\n\n\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eInstallation instructions\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\n\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e\u003ci\u003e\u003cb\u003ePLEASE NOTE:\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/i\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e Before installation, surfaces must be dry and free of dust and grease (drying time for freshly laid floors must be strictly observed)!\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eApply painter's absorbent fleece with the adhesive side down on the surface to be protected\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eAll surfaces must be dry and free of oil, grease, and dust before the protective fleece is laid.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eThe use of a safety knife is recommended for a clean cut at edges and corners and to avoid damage to the protective surface as well as cuts. \u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eGeneral\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\n\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eProperties \u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e100% removable without residue\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eNon-slip\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eReusable\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eHeat-radiating\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eExtremely robust\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eAbsorbent\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eDirt-resistant\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eEasy installation\/cleaning\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eLint-free\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eAbsorbent\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eVersatile\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eFree of harmful substances\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eSupply forms\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eRolls: 1 x 50 m (1 pallet = 30 rolls)\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eMaintenance\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eStore in a dry place\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eClean with a vacuum cleaner when laid\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003e\u003cb\u003eApplication area\u003c\/b\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eOn all surfaces exposed to extremely high mechanical loads\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eProtection on construction sites\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"en-GB\"\u003eDirt trap\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n ","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154390471003,"sku":"9.038","price":35.65,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/abdeckvliese-ch-9038-Malersaugvlies-220gm2-50m-rolle.jpg?v=1790087054"},{"product_id":"speedyfix-uv-abdeckfolie-270-cm-16-m-mit-klebeband","title":"Speedy Mask 270cm x 16m","description":"SpeedyFix-UV, 270 cm x 16 lm HDPE masking film + long-term adhesive tape 19mm\n\nFast, simple and time-saving masking system, also for outdoor use. Highly static, tear-resistant HDPE film, folded\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eApplication:\u003c\/strong\u003e\nFast, simple and time-saving masking system, also for outdoor use.\nLarge areas during painting, decorating and renovation work can be\nprotected quickly and effectively. Thanks to the high static charge, the film\nadheres quickly to surfaces as well as to objects such as furniture, etc.\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eProperties:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n- Good UV resistance (up to 3 weeks)\n- Can be easily removed by hand\n- HDPE film with static charge, holds paint drops firmly\nStorage: Room temperature, 50% relative humidity, away from direct sunlight\nShelf life: 18 months, at room temperature, 50% relative humidity\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDisclaimer:\u003c\/strong\u003e\nThe information corresponds to the current state of development. It does not\nclaim to be exhaustive. Professional and therefore successful processing\nof the products is beyond our control. A warranty can therefore only be\nassumed for the quality of the products, not for the processing. It is the\nresponsibility of the user to determine the suitability of our products for\ntheir purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended.","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154410099035,"sku":"9.029","price":2.9,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Abdeckfolie-mit-Klebeband-270cm-x-17lfm-01.png?v=1790087065"},{"product_id":"gewebeklebeband-speedyfix-300-uv-30-mm-25-m","title":"SpeedyFix cloth tape - 300 UV 30mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eSpeedyFix cloth tape - 300 UV 30 mm x 25m, blue, long-term, removable without residue for up to 3 weeks (depending on surface and stress factors). Not suitable for natural stone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVersatile for use in the painting and plastering trades,\n\u003cbr\u003efacade construction, and general construction trades -\n\u003cbr\u003eespecially where increased UV resistance\n\u003cbr\u003eis required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSuitable for applications of up to three weeks\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154418815323,"sku":"9.044","price":2.7,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/speedyfix-gewebeklebeband.jpg?v=1790087072"},{"product_id":"gewebeklebeband-speedyfix-300-uv-38-mm-25-m","title":"SpeedyFix cloth tape - 300 UV 38mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eSpeedyFix fabric adhesive tape - 300 UV 38 mm x 25 m, blue, long-term, residue-free removal for up to 3 weeks, (depending on surface and load) Not suitable for natural stone\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVersatile for use in the painting and plastering trade,\n\u003cbr\u003efacade construction and general construction trades -\n\u003cbr\u003eespecially where increased UV resistance\n\u003cbr\u003eis required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSuitable for applications of up to three weeks\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154427203931,"sku":"9.045","price":3.3,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/speedyfix-gewebeklebeband_3144368e-ca88-435c-a974-ec41af0e1553.jpg?v=1790087077"},{"product_id":"gewebeklebeband-speedyfix-300-uv-50mm","title":"SpeedyFix Cloth Tape - 300 UV 50mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eSpeedyFix cloth tape - 300 UV 50 mm x 25m, blue, long-term, removable without residue for up to 3 weeks (depending on surface and stress) Not suitable for natural stone\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVersatile for use in the painting and plastering trade,\n\u003cbr\u003efacade construction and general construction work -\n\u003cbr\u003eespecially where increased UV resistance\n\u003cbr\u003eis required. Suitable for applications of\n\u003cbr\u003eup to three weeks\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154434609499,"sku":"9.046","price":3.65,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/speedyfix-gewebeklebeband_072bd572-6075-4aa5-a5dd-61c267b985ca.jpg?v=1790087083"},{"product_id":"abdeckband-super-gele-gold-19-mm-50-m","title":"Gold masking tape 19mm","description":"\u003ch1\u003eSuper Gold Masking Tape\u003c\/h1\u003e\n19 mm x 50 m, heat-resistant up to 80° C\nmade of rice paper with flat crepe adhesive tape\nyellow for sharp paint edges\n\nExtra thin, smooth paper adhesive tape, very conformable, medium adhesion.\nBacking material: paper\nColor: gold-yellow\nThickness: 0.08 mm\nTensile strength: 55 N \/ 25 mm\nElongation at break: 5%\nAdhesive type: acrylate\nAdhesion to steel: 6 N \/ 25 mm\nTemperature resistance: short-term up to 60°C\nUV resistance: can be used for up to 30 days\nShelf life: 12 months\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eApplication\u003c\/strong\u003e\nFor masking work on almost all smooth surfaces. For extra sharp paint edges due to extra\nthin paper. Suitable for interior and exterior use and for all standard painting work.\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNote:\u003c\/strong\u003e\nOur technical application recommendations are intended to support the buyer or\nuser. They do not release you from the obligation to test our products for their suitability for the\nintended purpose. Claims for damages and warranty claims cannot be accepted\nfor self-adhesive products. Subject to change.\n\n ","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154442113371,"sku":"9.047","price":2.2,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/abdeckband-gold-verschiedene.jpg?v=1790087088"},{"product_id":"super-gele-masking-tape-gold-25-mm-50-m","title":"Gold masking tape 25mm","description":"\u003ch1\u003eSuper Gold Masking Tape\u003c\/h1\u003e\n25 mm x 50 m, heat resistant up to 80° C\nmade of rice paper with flat crepe adhesive tape\nyellow for sharp paint edges\n\nExtra thin, smooth paper adhesive tape, very flexible, medium adhesive strength.\nCarrier material: paper\nColor: gold-yellow\nThickness: 0.08 mm\nTensile strength: 55 N \/ 25 mm\nElongation at break: 5%\nAdhesive type: acrylate\nAdhesion to steel: 6 N \/ 25 mm\nTemperature resistance: short-term up to 60°C\nUV resistance: usable for up to 30 days\nShelf life: 12 months\n\nApplication\nFor masking work on almost all smooth surfaces. For extra flat paint edges due to extra\nthin paper. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use and for all standard painting work.\n\nNote:\nOur technical application recommendations serve to support the buyer or the\nprocessor. They do not release you from the obligation to fundamentally test our products for their suitability for the\nintended application. Claims for damages and warranty claims cannot be recognized\nfor self-adhesive products. Subject to change.","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154449912155,"sku":"9.048","price":2.75,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/abdeckband-gold-verschiedene_75eba185-b23d-4645-b40c-8f398b1b86ba.jpg?v=1790087094"},{"product_id":"abdeckband-super-gele-gold-30-mm-50-m","title":"Gold masking tape 30mm","description":"\u003ch1\u003eSuper Gold Masking Tape\u003c\/h1\u003e\n30 mm x 50 m, heat-resistant up to 80° C\nmade of rice paper with flat crepe adhesive tape\nyellow\nfor sharp-edged paint lines\n\nExtra thin, smooth paper masking tape, very flexible, medium adhesive strength.\nCarrier material: Paper\nColor: gold-yellow\nThickness: 0.08 mm\nTensile strength: 55 N \/ 25 mm\nElongation at break: 5%\nAdhesive type: Acrylate\nAdhesion to steel: 6 N \/ 25 mm\nTemperature resistance: short-term up to 60°C\nUV resistance: can be used for up to 30 days\nShelf life: 12 months\n\u003c!--nl --\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eApplication:\u003c\/strong\u003e\nFor masking work on almost all smooth surfaces. For extra flat paint edges due to extra\nthin paper. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use and for all common painting tasks.\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNote:\u003c\/strong\u003e\nOur technical application recommendations are intended to support the buyer or the\nprocessor. They do not exempt the user from checking our products for their suitability for the\nintended application. Claims for damages and warranty claims cannot be recognized\nfor self-adhesive products. Subject to change.","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154457448795,"sku":"9.049","price":3.3,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/abdeckband-gold-verschiedene_0b12cc9c-4140-4a7e-9990-2317e166fc7b.jpg?v=1790087099"},{"product_id":"abdeckband-super-gele-gold-38-mm-50-m","title":"Gold masking tape 38mm","description":"\u003ch1\u003eSuper Gel Masking Tape Gold\u003c\/h1\u003e\n38 mm x 50 m, heat-resistant up to 80°C\nmade of rice paper with flat crepe adhesive tape\nyellow for sharp paint edges\n\nExtra thin, smooth paper masking tape, highly conformable, medium adhesive strength.\nCarrier material: Paper\nColor: gold-yellow\nThickness: 0.08 mm\nTensile strength: 55 N \/ 25 mm\nElongation at break: 5%\nAdhesive type: Acrylate\nAdhesion to steel: 6 N \/ 25 mm\nTemperature resistance: short-term up to 60°C\nUV resistance: can be used for up to 30 days\nShelf life: 12 months\n\nApplication\nFor masking work on almost all smooth surfaces. For extra flat paint edges due to extra thin paper. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use and for all common painting work.\n\nNote:\nOur technical application recommendations are intended to support the buyer or user. They do not release you from the obligation to test our products for their suitability for the intended purpose. Claims for damages and warranty cannot be accepted for self-adhesive products. Subject to change.","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154465575259,"sku":"9.050","price":4.2,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/abdeckband-gold-verschiedene_38fdab27-48c9-4fb0-91bb-f3ca5fdc98fd.jpg?v=1790087104"},{"product_id":"abdeckband-super-gele-gold-50-mm-50-m","title":"Gold masking tape 50mm","description":"\u003ch1\u003eSuper Gel Masking Tape Gold\u003c\/h1\u003e\n50 mm x 50 m roll, heat resistant up to 80° C\nmade of rice paper with flat crepe adhesive tape\nyellow\nfor sharp-edged paint lines\n\nExtra thin, smooth paper masking tape, very flexible, medium adhesive strength.\nCarrier material: Paper\nColor: gold-yellow\nThickness: 0.08 mm\nTensile strength: 55 N \/ 25 mm\nElongation at break: 5%\nAdhesive type: Acrylate\nAdhesion to steel: 6 N \/ 25 mm\nTemperature resistance: short-term up to 60°C\nUV resistance: can be used for up to 30 days\nShelf life: 12 months\n\nApplication\nFor masking work on almost all smooth surfaces. For extra flat paint edges due to extra\nthin paper. Suitable for interior and exterior use and for all common painting work.\n\nNote:\nOur application-technical recommendations are intended to support the buyer or\nprocessor. They do not release the user from the obligation to fundamentally test our products for their suitability for the\nintended application. Claims for damages and warranty claims cannot be accepted\nfor self-adhesive products. Subject to change.","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154470228315,"sku":"9.051","price":5.5,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/abdeckband-gold-verschiedene_91ee3916-1f10-45a8-8eb3-4a876cf5b4f6.jpg?v=1790087110"},{"product_id":"pe-gewebeklebeband-48-mm-50-m-universal","title":"Cloth duct tape concrete yellow 48mm x 50m","description":"\u003cstrong\u003eDESCRIPTION:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\nThe universal PE fabric adhesive tape allows for quick and easy execution of uncomplicated repairs.\nVery good adhesion to all types of surfaces. The tape can be easily torn by hand.\nReady-to-use and economical adhesive tape.\n\nA hand-tearable repair tape based on synthetic rubber with a water-resistant\ncoated polyester fabric. The concrete fabric adhesive tape has strong initial tack and good adhesive strength.\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAPPLICATION AREA:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\nThe fabric adhesive tape adheres perfectly to smooth and rough surfaces such as stainless steel, polyethylene, glass\nand wood and is suitable for repairing, sealing, fastening, protecting, and bundling.\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTECHNICAL DATA:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\nCarrier : LDPE film + polyester fabric\nAdhesive : Solvent-free \/ synthetic rubber\nTotal thickness [µm] : 150\nMesh count (mesh) : 18\nAdhesion to steel [N\/25mm] : 17.5\nRolling ball tack [cm] : \u0026lt; 3\nTensile strength [N\/25mm] : 70\nApplication temperature: -10 to +75°C\nWidth:48mm\nLength 50m\nCore: 76mm\n\nStore at room temperature. Keep away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.\nIf storage conditions are met, the tape can be stored for 12 months.\n\nThe above information represents average data obtained from random analyses.\nSelected samples from production and do not constitute a guarantee for the final use.\n\n ","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154476880219,"sku":"9.037","price":3.9,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gewebeklebeband-Beton-gelb-1.jpg?v=1790087115"},{"product_id":"abdeckband-selbstklebend-19mm","title":"Masking tape yellow 19 mm self-adhesive – 50 m","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMasking tape yellow 19 mm self-adhesive – 50 m\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSelf-adhesive masking tape made of impregnated paper for painting and varnishing work up to 80 °C.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eyellow 19 mm masking tape\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for reliably masking and protecting surfaces during painting and varnishing work. The slightly creped, impregnated paper and the natural rubber-based adhesive layer allow for versatile application on various surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePractical masking tape for painting and varnishing work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe self-adhesive painter's tape is specifically designed for masking tasks during varnishing and painting work. Due to its properties, it can be used on different surfaces and is suitable for both professional use and general renovation and masking work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCan be used for up to 3 days:\u003c\/strong\u003e When applied correctly, the masking tape can remain on the surface for up to 3 days without leaving any residue.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFeatures\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e19 mm width\u003c\/strong\u003e for precise masking work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e50 m roll length\u003c\/strong\u003e for numerous applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eYellow color\u003c\/strong\u003e for good visibility during work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSelf-adhesive\u003c\/strong\u003e with a natural rubber-based adhesive layer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSlightly creped, impregnated paper\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003epainting and varnishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFor applications up to \u003cstrong\u003e80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eUsage duration up to \u003cstrong\u003e3 days without leaving residue\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMasking tape yellow 19 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eRoll length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e50 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eWidth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e19 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSlightly creped, impregnated paper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eAdhesive layer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNatural rubber-based\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTemperature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 80 °C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eUsage duration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 3 days without leaving residue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eApplication\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePainting and varnishing work, masking of surfaces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat tasks is this masking tape suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e19 mm masking tape\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical solution for painting and varnishing work where surfaces, areas, or edges need to be protected from paint and varnish. The narrow version is particularly suitable for masking tasks that require a more precise tape width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eImportant application note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eOur technical recommendations for application are intended to support the buyer or processor. They do not exempt you from the obligation to fundamentally test our products for their suitability for the intended purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor self-adhesive products, claims for damages and warranty claims cannot be recognized. Subject to change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the 19 mm masking tape\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the masking tape used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tape is mainly used for masking tasks during painting and varnishing work and can be used on various surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow wide is the masking tape?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is 19 mm wide and 50 m long.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eUp to what temperature can the tape be used?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is intended for applications at temperatures up to 80 °C.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long can the masking tape remain on the surface?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen applied correctly, the tape can be used for up to 3 days without leaving any residue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the masking tape based on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tape consists of slightly creped, impregnated paper and has a natural rubber-based adhesive layer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eYellow 19 mm masking tape at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eself-adhesive yellow 19 mm masking tape\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical solution for clean masking during painting and varnishing work. With a 50 m roll length, a natural rubber adhesive layer, and suitability for temperatures up to 80 °C, it offers versatile application possibilities in trade and renovation projects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür wird das Abdeckband verwendet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Band wird hauptsächlich für Abdeckarbeiten bei Maler- und Lackierarbeiten eingesetzt und kann auf unterschiedlichen Oberflächen verwendet werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie breit ist das Abdeckband?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband ist 19 mm breit und 50 m lang.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Bis zu welcher Temperatur kann das Band eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband ist für Anwendungen bei Temperaturen bis zu 80 °C vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lange kann das Abdeckband auf der Oberfläche bleiben?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Bei geeigneter Anwendung kann das Band bis zu 3 Tage eingesetzt werden, ohne Rückstände zu hinterlassen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Auf welchem Material basiert das Abdeckband?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Band besteht aus leicht gekrepptem, imprägniertem Papier und verfügt über eine Haftschicht auf Naturkautschukbasis.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154856956251,"sku":"9.156","price":1.4,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/selbstklebendes-abklebeband.jpg?v=1790087389"},{"product_id":"abdeckband-selbstklebend-25mm","title":"Masking tape yellow 25 mm self-adhesive – 50 m up to 80 °C","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMasking tape yellow 25 mm self-adhesive – 50 m\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePainter's tape for painting and varnishing work up to 80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eself-adhesive masking tape 25 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e consists of lightly creped, impregnated paper and features a natural rubber-based adhesive layer. It is suitable for \u003cstrong\u003emasking and protecting surfaces during painting and varnishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e as well as for corresponding applications in the automotive industry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith its 25 mm width, the yellow masking tape is suitable for various masking tasks. It has been developed for use on different surfaces and is intended for painting and varnishing work at temperatures of up to 80 °C.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVersatile masking tape:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe 25 mm wide paper tape offers a roll length of 50 meters and can be used residue-free for up to 3 days when applied appropriately.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe most important advantages of the masking tape\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e25 mm width\u003c\/strong\u003e – practical dimension for versatile masking tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e50 meter roll length\u003c\/strong\u003e – sufficient material for numerous applications.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsable up to 80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e – suitable for corresponding painting and varnishing work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 3 days duration of use\u003c\/strong\u003e – residue-free when applied appropriately.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightly creped, impregnated paper\u003c\/strong\u003e – flexible backing material for masking tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural rubber adhesive layer\u003c\/strong\u003e – self-adhesive design for masking surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMasking tape 25 mm for painting work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003epainter's tape 25 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is used for masking and protecting surfaces during painting and varnishing work. It can be used to cover areas that need to be protected from paint or varnish during processing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to painting work, the self-adhesive paper tape is also mainly used for corresponding applications in the \u003cstrong\u003eautomotive industry\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSelf-adhesive masking tape up to 80 °C\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is intended for use at temperatures of up to \u003cstrong\u003e80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e. The special design allows it to be applied to various surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTest the surface beforehand:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nWith self-adhesive products, different surfaces and operating conditions can influence the result. Therefore, the suitability of the tape should be checked before use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSelf-adhesive masking tape\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eWidth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eRoll length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e50 meters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTemperature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 80 °C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLightly creped, impregnated paper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eAdhesive layer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNatural rubber-based\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDuration of use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 3 days residue-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eApplication\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePainting work, varnishing work, automotive industry\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplication notes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCheck suitability for the respective surface before application.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eApply the masking tape evenly to the designated surface.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eObserve the specified temperature conditions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRemove the tape within the specified duration of use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eImportant note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eOur application-technical recommendations serve to support the buyer or processor. They do not release you from the obligation to fundamentally check the product for its suitability for the intended purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith \u003cstrong\u003eself-adhesive products\u003c\/strong\u003e, the surface, temperature, duration of use, and other conditions can influence the application result. Claims for damages and warranty claims cannot be recognized for self-adhesive products. \u003cstrong\u003eSubject to change.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the masking tape 25 mm\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the 25 mm masking tape used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is used for masking and protecting surfaces during painting and varnishing work. It is also suitable for corresponding applications in the automotive industry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow wide is the masking tape?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is 25 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long is a roll?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne roll has a length of 50 meters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eUp to what temperature can the masking tape be used?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is intended for applications at temperatures of up to 80 °C.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long can the masking tape be used?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen applied appropriately, the masking tape can be used residue-free for up to 3 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the masking tape made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe backing material consists of lightly creped, impregnated paper. The adhesive layer is based on natural rubber.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the masking tape suitable for different surfaces?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The masking tape has been developed for use on different surfaces. The specific suitability should be checked before application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy yellow 25 mm masking tape at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eself-adhesive masking tape 25 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is intended for painting and varnishing work as well as corresponding applications in the automotive industry. The 50-meter roll of lightly creped, impregnated paper can be used residue-free for up to 3 days when applied appropriately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNote for processing:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nCheck the masking tape for its suitability for the respective surface and the intended application purpose before use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür wird das Abdeckband 25 mm verwendet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband wird zum Abdecken und Schützen von Oberflächen bei Maler- und Lackierarbeiten verwendet. Es eignet sich auch für entsprechende Anwendungen in der Automobilindustrie.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie breit ist das Abdeckband?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband ist 25 mm breit.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lang ist eine Rolle?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Eine Rolle hat eine Länge von 50 Metern.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Bis zu welcher Temperatur kann das Abdeckband eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband ist für Anwendungen bei Temperaturen bis zu 80 °C vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lange kann das Abdeckband eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Bei geeigneter Anwendung kann das Abdeckband bis zu 3 Tage ohne Rückstände eingesetzt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material besteht das Abdeckband?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Trägermaterial besteht aus leicht gekrepptem, imprägniertem Papier. Die Haftschicht basiert auf Naturkautschuk.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154865705307,"sku":"9.157","price":1.5,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/selbstklebendes-abklebeband_819b42d2-860d-4c03-a38f-4d64fbe2fa31.jpg?v=1790087394"},{"product_id":"abdeckband-selbstklebend-38mm","title":"Masking tape yellow 38 mm self-adhesive – 50 m up to 80 °C","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .product-description h2 { color: #1170AB; font-size: 2em; margin-bottom: 8px; } .product-description h3 { color: #1170AB; margin-top: 32px; } .product-description strong { color: #B61B1F; } .product-description .intro { font-weight: 600; font-size: 1.1em; line-height: 1.6; border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F; padding: 12px 16px; margin: 20px 0; } .product-description .highlight-box { background: #f4f8fb; border-left: 4px solid #1170AB; padding: 16px 20px; margin: 24px 0; line-height: 1.6; } .product-description .features-list { padding-left: 22px; } .product-description .features-list li { margin-bottom: 10px; line-height: 1.5; } .product-description table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 20px 0; } .product-description th, .product-description td { padding: 11px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd; text-align: left; vertical-align: top; } .product-description th { color: #1170AB; background: #f4f8fb; } .product-description a { color: #1170AB; font-weight: 600; } .product-description .faq summary { color: #1170AB; font-weight: 700; cursor: pointer; padding: 12px 0; } .product-description .faq-content { padding: 0 0 12px 0; } \u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSelf-adhesive masking tape 38 mm – 50 m\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eYellow painter's tape for painting and varnishing work up to 80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eself-adhesive masking tape 38 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e consists of slightly creped, impregnated paper and has a natural rubber-based adhesive layer. It is suitable for \u003cstrong\u003emasking and protecting surfaces during painting and varnishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e as well as for corresponding applications in the automotive industry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 38 mm wide masking tape can be used on various surfaces and is intended for jobs where areas not to be treated need to be protected during varnishing or painting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003ePractical painter's and masking tape:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e With a width of 38 mm and a roll length of 50 meters, the self-adhesive paper tape is suitable for versatile masking tasks. It is intended for temperatures up to 80 °C. \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe most important advantages of the masking tape\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e38 mm width\u003c\/strong\u003e – versatile width for various masking tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e50-meter roll length\u003c\/strong\u003e – sufficient material for extensive work.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsable up to 80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e – suitable for corresponding painting and varnishing applications.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 3 days usage duration\u003c\/strong\u003e – leaves no residue when applied correctly.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSlightly creped paper\u003c\/strong\u003e – flexible backing material for use on various surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural rubber adhesive layer\u003c\/strong\u003e – self-adhesive design for easy masking.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMasking tape 38 mm for painting work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003epainter's tape 38 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is used for masking and protecting surfaces during painting and varnishing work. Areas that should not be treated can be protected from paint or varnish with it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to classic painting tasks, the masking tape is also intended for corresponding applications in the \u003cstrong\u003eautomotive industry\u003c\/strong\u003e. The natural rubber-based adhesive layer allows for application on various surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable for varnishing work up to 80 °C\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe self-adhesive masking tape is intended for applications  at temperatures up to \u003cstrong\u003e80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows it to be used for corresponding varnishing and painting work as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eTest before use:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e The suitability of a self-adhesive product depends on the specific substrate and the operating conditions, among other factors. For delicate or unknown surfaces, the tape should first be tested on an inconspicuous area. \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003eSelf-adhesive masking tape\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eWidth\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eRoll length\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003e50 meters\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eTemperature\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003eUp to 80 °C\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003eSlightly creped, impregnated paper\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eAdhesive layer\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003eNatural rubber-based\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eUsage duration\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003eUp to 3 days without residue\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003cth\u003eApplication\u003c\/th\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePainting work, varnishing work, automotive industry\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplication instructions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eCheck the surface for suitability before application.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eApply the masking tape evenly to the intended substrate.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eObserve the specified temperature conditions during application.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRemove the tape within the intended usage duration.\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eImportant note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eOur application-technical recommendations are intended to support the buyer or processor. They do not release you from the responsibility to generally check the product for its suitability for the intended purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith \u003cstrong\u003eself-adhesive products\u003c\/strong\u003e, the substrate, temperature, duration of use, and other conditions can influence the application result. Claims for damages and warranty claims cannot be recognized for self-adhesive products. \u003cstrong\u003eSubject to change.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the 38 mm masking tape\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the 38 mm masking tape used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e \u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is used for masking and protecting surfaces during painting and varnishing work. It is also suitable for corresponding applications in the automotive industry.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e \u003csummary\u003eHow wide is the masking tape?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e \u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is 38 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e \u003csummary\u003eHow long is a roll?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e \u003cp\u003eOne roll of masking tape has a length of 50 meters.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e \u003csummary\u003eUp to what temperature can the masking tape be used?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e \u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is intended for applications at temperatures up to 80 °C.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e \u003csummary\u003eHow long can the masking tape be used?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e \u003cp\u003eWith correct application, the masking tape can be used for up to 3 days without leaving residue.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e \u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the masking tape made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e \u003cp\u003eThe backing material consists of slightly creped, impregnated paper. The adhesive layer is based on natural rubber.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e \u003csummary\u003eCan the masking tape be used on various surfaces?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e \u003cp\u003eYes. The masking tape has properties that allow it to be used on various surfaces. The specific suitability should be tested before application.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy self-adhesive masking tape 38 mm at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eself-adhesive masking tape 38 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical solution for painting and varnishing work as well as for corresponding applications in the automotive industry. The 50-meter roll of slightly creped, impregnated paper is intended for temperatures up to 80 °C.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eProcessing note:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Before use, the masking tape should always be checked for its suitability for the specific substrate and the intended purpose. \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e { \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [ { \"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Wofür wird das Abdeckband 38 mm verwendet?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": { \"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband wird zum Abdecken und Schützen von Oberflächen bei Maler- und Lackierarbeiten verwendet. Es eignet sich auch für entsprechende Anwendungen in der Automobilindustrie.\" } }, { \"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Wie breit ist das Abdeckband?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": { \"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband ist 38 mm breit.\" } }, { \"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Wie lang ist eine Rolle?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": { \"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Eine Rolle des Abdeckbands hat eine Länge von 50 Metern.\" } }, { \"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Bis zu welcher Temperatur kann das Abdeckband eingesetzt werden?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": { \"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband ist für Anwendungen bei Temperaturen bis zu 80 °C vorgesehen.\" } }, { \"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Wie lange kann das Abdeckband verwendet werden?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": { \"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Bei geeigneter Anwendung kann das Abdeckband bis zu 3 Tage ohne Rückstände eingesetzt werden.\" } }, { \"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material besteht das Abdeckband?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": { \"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Das Trägermaterial besteht aus leicht gekrepptem, imprägniertem Papier. Die Haftschicht basiert auf Naturkautschuk.\" } } ] } \u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154874061147,"sku":"9.158","price":2.3,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/selbstklebendes-abklebeband_096bc95b-403b-4258-bd56-12a2934243e0.jpg?v=1790087399"},{"product_id":"abdeckband-selbstklebend-50mm","title":"Masking tape yellow 50 mm self-adhesive – 50 m up to 80 °C","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMasking Tape yellow 50 mm \/ 50 m – Painter's Tape up to 80 °C\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSelf-adhesive masking tape for painting, varnishing, and automotive industry applications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eyellow masking tape\u003c\/strong\u003e is made of slightly creped, impregnated paper and features a natural rubber-based adhesive layer. It is suitable for \u003cstrong\u003emasking and protecting surfaces during painting and varnishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be used at temperatures of up to \u003cstrong\u003e80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDue to its special properties, the self-adhesive paper tape can be used on various surfaces. This makes it suitable for both classic painting tasks and applications where surfaces need to be reliably masked during varnishing work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor painting and varnishing work:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe yellow masking tape is designed for temperatures of up to 80 °C and, when used correctly, can be applied for up to 3 days without leaving any residue.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe main advantages of the masking tape\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e50-meter roll length\u003c\/strong\u003e – practical unit size for various masking jobs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTemperature resistant up to 80 °C\u003c\/strong\u003e – suitable for corresponding painting and varnishing applications.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsable for up to 3 days\u003c\/strong\u003e – without residue when used correctly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSlightly creped paper\u003c\/strong\u003e – flexible masking material for different surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural rubber adhesive layer\u003c\/strong\u003e – self-adhesive version for use as masking tape.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eYellow color\u003c\/strong\u003e – highly visible masking tape for use during surface work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMasking tape for painting and varnishing work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePainter's tape\u003c\/strong\u003e is used to cover surfaces that need to be protected during a varnishing or painting project. The yellow paper masking tape can be used for this purpose on various surfaces and serves to mask off areas that are not to be treated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tape can be used in particular for classic \u003cstrong\u003epainting and varnishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e. This type of self-adhesive masking tape is also used in the automotive industry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable for different surfaces\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape was developed for application on a variety of surfaces. Before use, the suitability for the respective substrate and application purpose should be checked.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant regarding self-adhesive products:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe actual suitability depends on the respective substrate, ambient conditions, and the specific application. A preliminary test is recommended for sensitive or unknown surfaces.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMasking tape \/ Painter's tape 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eRoll length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e50 meters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTemperature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 80 °C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSlightly creped, impregnated paper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eAdhesive layer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNatural rubber-based\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eUsage duration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 3 days without residue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePainting work, varnishing work, automotive industry\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplication instructions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eApply the masking tape to a suitable, clean surface.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTest suitability on the specific surface before large-scale application.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eObserve the specified temperature conditions during processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRemove the tape after use according to the intended duration of application.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eImportant note on application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe application-technical recommendations are intended to assist the buyer or user. They do not release you from the responsibility of fundamentally checking the product's suitability for the intended purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEspecially with self-adhesive products, the substrate, temperature, duration of exposure, and other ambient conditions can influence the result. \u003cstrong\u003eSubject to change.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the masking tape\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the yellow masking tape be used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is particularly suitable for covering surfaces during painting and varnishing work as well as for corresponding applications in the automotive industry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eUp to what temperature can the masking tape be used?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe masking tape is intended for applications at temperatures of up to 80 °C.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long is a roll of masking tape?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne roll has a length of 50 meters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long can the masking tape be used?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen used correctly, the masking tape can be applied for up to 3 days without leaving any residue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the masking tape made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tape consists of slightly creped, impregnated paper and features a natural rubber-based adhesive layer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the masking tape suitable for different surfaces?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The masking tape was developed for use on various surfaces. The specific suitability should be checked before application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the masking tape be used for varnishing work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The masking tape is explicitly intended for masking surfaces during varnishing and painting work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy yellow masking tape 50 m at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eyellow 50 mm masking tape with a 50-meter roll length\u003c\/strong\u003e is a versatile solution for masking surfaces during painting and varnishing work. The paper version with a natural rubber adhesive layer is designed for applications up to 80 °C and can be used for up to 3 days when applied correctly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNote:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAlways check the suitability of the masking tape for the specific substrate and the intended purpose before use.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür kann das gelbe Abdeckband verwendet werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband eignet sich insbesondere zum Abdecken von Oberflächen bei Maler- und Lackierarbeiten sowie für entsprechende Anwendungen in der Automobilindustrie.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Bis zu welcher Temperatur kann das Abdeckband eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband ist für Anwendungen bei Temperaturen bis zu 80 °C vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lang ist eine Rolle Abdeckband?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Eine Rolle hat eine Länge von 50 Metern.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lange kann das Abdeckband eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Abdeckband kann bei geeigneter Anwendung bis zu 3 Tage ohne Rückstände eingesetzt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material besteht das Abdeckband?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Band besteht aus leicht gekrepptem, imprägniertem Papier und besitzt eine auf Naturkautschuk basierende Haftschicht.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist das Abdeckband für verschiedene Oberflächen geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Abdeckband wurde für die Anwendung auf verschiedenen Oberflächen entwickelt. Die konkrete Eignung sollte vor der Anwendung geprüft werden.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154881794395,"sku":"9.159","price":2.9,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/selbstklebendes-abklebeband_96b31673-e9a9-4f37-83b6-fae4c367cb90.jpg?v=1790087404"},{"product_id":"gips-spachtelmasse-uniflott-knauf-1-palette-42x25kg","title":"Knauf Uniflott gypsum filler 1 pallet – 42 × 25 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKnauf Uniflott Gypsum Filler – 1 Pallet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrand quality from Knauf for the professional manual filling of gypsum boards.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eKnauf Uniflott is a gypsum filler specifically developed for drywall construction for the manual filling of gypsum boards, Knauf acoustic boards, and Knauf Brio elements. Its synthetic additives ensure smooth application, while the filler is impressive for its \u003cstrong\u003elow drying shrinkage and high joint strength\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnauf Uniflott for Drywall Construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe powdered filler is mixed with water and is easy to work with thanks to its smooth consistency. It is particularly suitable for work on gypsum boards, making it a practical solution for the professional finishing of joints and filling work in interior spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical for construction site use:\u003c\/strong\u003e Once mixed, Uniflott remains workable for up to approx. 45 minutes. The compound then dries quickly and is very easy to sand once cured.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eYour Advantages with Knauf Uniflott\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpecifically for gypsum boards:\u003c\/strong\u003e Gypsum filler tailored to the requirements of drywall construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSmooth consistency:\u003c\/strong\u003e Allows for easy and comfortable filling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh joint strength:\u003c\/strong\u003e For stable and resilient filled joints.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow drying shrinkage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Supports reliable execution of filling work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRapid hardening:\u003c\/strong\u003e The applied filler dries quickly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEasy to sand:\u003c\/strong\u003e The dried surface is very easy to finish.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable for Various Knauf Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eApplication\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSuitable\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGypsum boards\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eKnauf acoustic boards\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eKnauf Brio elements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eArea of application\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrand\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eKnauf\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeries\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUniflott\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eType\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFiller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUse\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFiller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArea of application\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSubstrate\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGypsum boards\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRange of use\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFloor, wall, ceiling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWorking time\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 45 minutes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConsumption\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDepending on application\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHAN\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e3114\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePallet unit\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e42 × 25 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal quantity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1,050 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1 Pallet Knauf Uniflott – 42 sacks of 25 kg each\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis sales unit contains \u003cstrong\u003e42 sacks, each weighing 25 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, of Knauf Uniflott. With a total of 1,050 kg, the pallet is particularly suitable for larger drywall and filling projects where a larger amount of material is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eBulk container for construction professionals:\u003c\/strong\u003e The complete pallet provides practical storage for extensive filling work and larger construction projects.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Documentation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFurther information on properties and processing can be found in the technical documents from Knauf:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Uniflott-Technische-Daten.pdf?v=1791461523\" rel=\"noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eKnauf Uniflott – Technical data as PDF\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Uniflott_Sicherheitsdatenblatt.pdf?v=1791461521\" rel=\"noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eKnauf Uniflott – Safety data sheet as PDF\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently Asked Questions about Knauf Uniflott\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is Knauf Uniflott used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKnauf Uniflott is a gypsum filler for the manual filling of gypsum boards, Knauf acoustic boards, and Knauf Brio elements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs Knauf Uniflott suitable for interior use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. According to the stated product data, Knauf Uniflott is intended for interior use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long does Knauf Uniflott remain workable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAfter mixing, the working time is approx. 45 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs Knauf Uniflott easy to sand?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The dried filler is very easy to sand and finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the pallet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet contains 42 sacks of Knauf Uniflott, each weighing 25 kg, totaling 1,050 kg of filler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder Knauf Uniflott at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith \u003cstrong\u003eKnauf Uniflott gypsum filler\u003c\/strong\u003e, you receive a filling material tailored to drywall construction for the manual filling of gypsum boards and other Knauf systems. The pallet with 42 × 25 kg is suitable for larger construction projects and corresponding material requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür wird Knauf Uniflott verwendet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Knauf Uniflott ist eine Gips-Spachtelmasse für die Handverspachtelung von Gipsplatten, Knauf-Akustikplatten und Knauf-Brio-Elementen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist Knauf Uniflott für den Innenbereich geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Knauf Uniflott ist laut den angegebenen Produktdaten für den Innenbereich vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lange ist Knauf Uniflott verarbeitbar?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Nach dem Anrühren beträgt die Verarbeitungszeit ca. 45 Minuten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Lässt sich Knauf Uniflott gut schleifen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die getrocknete Spachtelmasse lässt sich sehr gut schleifen und nachbearbeiten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist in der Palette enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Palette enthält 42 Säcke Knauf Uniflott mit jeweils 25 kg, also insgesamt 1'050 kg Spachtelmasse.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54154966303067,"sku":"9.016","price":1381.8,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/9.016-Gips-Spachtelmasse-Uniflott-Knauf.jpg?v=1790087454"},{"product_id":"300kg-putzlappen-trikot-bunt-30-pressballe-a-10kg","title":"300 kg cleaning rags, colored jersey – 30 x 10 kg compressed bales","description":"\u003ch2 class=\"product_title entry-title\"\u003eColored Jersey Cleaning Rags 30 x 10kg Compressed Bales\u003c\/h2\u003e\nThe colored jersey cleaning rags are ideal for the following applications:\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003efor particularly heavy-duty cleaning tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003emedium to heavy, absorbent jersey knit fabric with seams\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003emay contain plush\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003eperfect for universal use and for absorbing oils and lubricants, making them ideal for the production area\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\nThe high tear resistance and very high absorbency make our products an essential tool in the workplace.\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003ctable width=\"733\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eCotton knit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eCloth length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eapprox. 50cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eCloth width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eapprox. 50cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eAbsorbency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eTear resistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eOil absorption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eFeel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eDurability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eFor coarse and heavy-duty cleaning and wiping tasks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePackaging Information\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n \n\u003ctable width=\"100%\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eSales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003eCompressed bale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eWeight per sales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003e10kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003ePackaging dimensions (LxWxH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003e40 x 40 x 22cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"40%\"\u003eSales units per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd width=\"60%\"\u003e30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155037114715,"sku":"9.218-1","price":560.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/baustore-ch-putzlappen-palette-bunt_trikot.jpg?v=1790087507"},{"product_id":"tischlerplatte-22mm-einseitig-mit-nut","title":"Blockboard 22 mm, single-sided with groove – Elliottis Pine","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003e22 mm blockboard with one-sided groove\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003e22 mm blockboard with one-sided groove\u003c\/strong\u003e consists of 7-ply glued Elliottis pine plywood and was developed for use in modern drywall construction. The wall insert is suitable for supporting \u003cstrong\u003ewall-mounted, static loads\u003c\/strong\u003e and offers high load-bearing capacity thanks to its multi-layer structure.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBlockboard for drywall construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn modern drywall construction, wall inserts are used to prepare areas for the fastening of wall-mounted loads. The \u003cstrong\u003e22 mm thick blockboard\u003c\/strong\u003e made of Elliottis pine plywood is suitable for this application.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e7-ply glued:\u003c\/strong\u003e The blockboard consists of seven layers glued together. As a result, the 22 mm thick wall insert has a high load-bearing capacity for wall-mounted, static loads.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOne-sided groove 8 × 15 mm\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe blockboard has a length of \u003cstrong\u003e615 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a width of \u003cstrong\u003e220 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a thickness of 22 mm. One side is provided with an \u003cstrong\u003e8 × 15 mm groove\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e22 mm thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eDimensions: \u003cstrong\u003e615 × 220 × 22 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOne-sided with \u003cstrong\u003e8 × 15 mm groove\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e7-ply glued\u003c\/strong\u003e Elliottis pine plywood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWood species: \u003cstrong\u003eElliottis pine plywood EN 636-2 NS\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eQuality: \u003cstrong\u003eIV \/ IV\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for supporting \u003cstrong\u003ewall-mounted, static loads\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e1 pallet: \u003cstrong\u003e400 pieces\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions L × W × H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e615 × 220 × 22 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eGroove\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 × 15 mm, one-sided\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWood species\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eElliottis pine plywood EN 636-2 NS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eQuality\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eIV \/ IV\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eGluing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e7-ply glued\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDensity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e560 kg\/m³\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBonding class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFormaldehyde emission\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eE1, phenolic resin bonded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eReaction to fire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eD-s2, d0\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePentachlorophenol content\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePCP \u0026lt; 5 ppm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eThermal conductivity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e0.13\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBiological durability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWater vapour permeability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWet 70 µ \/ Dry 200 µ\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSound absorption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e250–500 Hz: 0.10\u003cbr\u003e1000–2000 Hz: 0.30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePallet quantity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e400 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial and properties\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e Elliottis pine plywood according to EN 636-2 NS\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuality:\u003c\/strong\u003e IV \/ IV\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStructure:\u003c\/strong\u003e 7-ply glued\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDensity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 560 kg\/m³\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReaction to fire:\u003c\/strong\u003e D-s2, d0\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFormaldehyde emission:\u003c\/strong\u003e E1\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the 22 mm blockboard\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the 22 mm blockboard used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blockboard is suitable for use as a \u003cstrong\u003ewall insert in drywall construction\u003c\/strong\u003e and serves to support wall-mounted, static loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the blockboard?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blockboard has dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e615 × 220 × 22 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the groove?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blockboard is provided with an \u003cstrong\u003e8 × 15 mm groove\u003c\/strong\u003e on one side.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the blockboard structured?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blockboard consists of \u003cstrong\u003e7-ply glued Elliottis pine plywood\u003c\/strong\u003e and has a quality of IV \/ IV.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many blockboards are on a pallet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA pallet contains \u003cstrong\u003e400 pieces\u003c\/strong\u003e of the 22 mm blockboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the density of the blockboard?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated density is \u003cstrong\u003e560 kg\/m³\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür wird die Tischlerplatte 22 mm verwendet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Tischlerplatte ist für den Einsatz als Wandeinlage im Trockenbau geeignet und dient zur Aufnahme von wandhängenden, ruhenden Lasten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Masse hat die Tischlerplatte?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Tischlerplatte hat eine Masse von 615 × 220 × 22 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Nut?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Tischlerplatte ist einseitig mit einer 8 × 15 mm grossen Nut versehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie ist die Tischlerplatte aufgebaut?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Tischlerplatte besteht aus 7-fach verleimtem Elliottis-Pine Sperrholz und hat die Qualität IV \/ IV.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viele Tischlerplatten sind auf einer Palette?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Eine Palette enthält 400 Stück der Tischlerplatte 22 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Rohdichte hat die Tischlerplatte?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Rohdichte beträgt 560 kg\/m³.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155185062235,"sku":"9.239","price":4.5,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Tischlerplatte-22mm.jpg?v=1790087603"},{"product_id":"600kg-putzlappen-trikot-bunt-60x-pressballe-a-10kg","title":"600kg cleaning rags, colorful jersey, 60x 10kg pressed bales","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eColored jersey cleaning rags 60 x 10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThese \u003cstrong\u003ecolored cleaning rags made of jersey knit\u003c\/strong\u003e are robust and absorbent cloths for particularly heavy-duty cleaning and wiping tasks. The medium-weight to heavy cotton knit fabric impresses with its \u003cstrong\u003ehigh tear resistance and high absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e and is particularly suitable for absorbing oils, lubricants, and coarse dirt.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust cleaning cloths for demanding work:\u003c\/strong\u003e The colored jersey cleaning rags are suitable for universal use, especially in production areas, workshops, and other work environments where durable and absorbent cleaning rags are required.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eJersey cleaning rags for heavy-duty cleaning tasks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003ecolored jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e have been designed for demanding and particularly heavy-duty cleaning tasks. The medium-weight to heavy jersey knit with seams offers a robust texture and is suitable for versatile cleaning tasks in commercial, trade, and industrial sectors.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003ehigh tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e allows for reliable use even during vigorous wiping and cleaning. At the same time, the high absorbency ensures that liquids as well as oils and lubricants can be absorbed.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\nSuitable \u003cstrong\u003efor particularly heavy-duty cleaning tasks\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMedium-weight to heavy, absorbent \u003cstrong\u003ejersey knit with seams\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e for demanding work applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e for effective liquid uptake\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for absorbing \u003cstrong\u003eoils and lubricants\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eIdeal for \u003cstrong\u003eproduction areas\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003euniversal use\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMay contain plush\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile use in production and workshops\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe colored jersey cleaning rags are versatile \u003cstrong\u003ecleaning cloths for industry, trade, and craft businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e. They are suitable for coarse and heavy cleaning work as well as for tasks requiring high absorbency and good tear resistance.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe cleaning rags are particularly practical in \u003cstrong\u003eproduction areas\u003c\/strong\u003e, for example, for absorbing oils and lubricants or for cleaning work surfaces, machines, and equipment. They can also be used in a variety of ways in workshops and for general maintenance work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGenerous cloth size:\u003c\/strong\u003e With a size of approx. \u003cstrong\u003e50 × 50 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the cleaning rags offer a practical surface area for extensive cleaning tasks. Their high volume and tactile quality support comfortable handling.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHigh absorbency and tear resistance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe combination of \u003cstrong\u003ehigh absorbency and high tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e makes these jersey cleaning rags a reliable assistant for demanding cleaning work. The cotton knit material has a high volume and a substantial feel.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWhether for absorbing \u003cstrong\u003eoils and lubricants\u003c\/strong\u003e, removing coarse dirt, or for general cleaning tasks – these colored cleaning rags can be used flexibly in your daily workflow.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCotton knit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCloth length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eapprox. 50 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCloth width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eapprox. 50 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAbsorbency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTear resistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOil absorption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTactile quality\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eService life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFor coarse and heavy-duty cleaning and wiping tasks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePackaging information\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCompressed bale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight per sales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 × 22 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSales units per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e60\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Colored jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the colored jersey cleaning rags suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe cleaning rags are suitable for \u003cstrong\u003ecoarse and heavy-duty cleaning and wiping tasks\u003c\/strong\u003e. They can be used universally and are particularly suitable for production areas and workshops.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the jersey cleaning rags suitable for oil and lubricants?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nYes. The product specification includes \u003cstrong\u003eoil absorption\u003c\/strong\u003e. Combined with their high absorbency, the cleaning rags are therefore suitable for absorbing oils and lubricants.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large are the individual cleaning rags?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe individual cleaning rags are approx. \u003cstrong\u003e50 × 50 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e in size.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the cleaning rags made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe cleaning rags are made of \u003cstrong\u003ecotton knit\u003c\/strong\u003e, or a medium-weight to heavy jersey fabric with seams.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow tear-resistant and absorbent are the cleaning rags?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe product specifications indicate both \u003cstrong\u003ehigh tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003ehigh absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e, making these rags suitable for demanding and heavy-duty cleaning tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the cleaning rags contain plush?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nYes. According to the product information, \u003cstrong\u003ethey may contain plush\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow are the cleaning rags delivered?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe cleaning rags are delivered as \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e. The packaging measures approx. 40 × 40 × 22 cm. There are 60 sales units per pallet.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür eignen sich die Putzlappen Trikot bunt?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen eignen sich für grobe und schwere Putz- und Reinigungsarbeiten. Sie können universell eingesetzt werden und eignen sich besonders für Produktionsbereiche und Werkstätten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind die Trikot-Putzlappen für Öl und Schmierstoffe geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Produktspezifikation weist eine Ölaufnahme aus. Zusammen mit der hohen Saugkraft eignen sich die Putzlappen für das Aufnehmen von Ölen und Schmierstoffen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross sind die einzelnen Putzlappen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die einzelnen Putzlappen haben eine Grösse von ca. 50 × 50 cm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material bestehen die Putzlappen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen bestehen aus Baumwollstrick beziehungsweise einem halbschweren bis schweren Trikotgewirke mit Nähten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie reissfest und saugfähig sind die Putzlappen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Produktspezifikationen weisen sowohl eine hohe Reissfestigkeit als auch eine hohe Saugkraft aus.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann Plüsch in den Putzlappen enthalten sein?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Gemäss Produktangabe kann Plüsch enthalten sein.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie werden die Putzlappen geliefert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen werden als 10-kg-Pressballen geliefert. Die Verpackung misst ca. 40 × 40 × 22 cm. Pro Palette sind 60 Verpackungseinheiten vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156362056027,"sku":"9.218-2","price":973.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/baustore-ch-putzlappen-palette-bunt_trikot_93d18514-1826-4206-b6b9-692fab1f6ac8.jpg?v=1790088504"},{"product_id":"300kg-putzlappen-frottee-bunt-30x-pressballe-a-10kg","title":"300 kg terry cloth cleaning rags, colorful, 30 x 10kg compressed bales","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eColored terry cloth cleaning rags 30 x 10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ecolored terry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e are versatile and absorbent wipes for general cleaning tasks. The lightweight knitted jersey fabric with seams offers \u003cstrong\u003ehigh absorbency and high tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it particularly suitable for picking up coarse dirt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIdeal for general cleaning tasks:\u003c\/strong\u003e The colored terry cloth cleaning rags are a practical solution for daily use in the workplace and are particularly suitable for cleaning tasks that require good absorbency and robust wipes.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile cleaning rags for daily use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ecolored terry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e are suitable for a wide range of cleaning tasks in industry, trade, business, and the household. The lightweight, absorbent knitted jersey fabric is stitched and combines a pleasant feel with high tear resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to their \u003cstrong\u003ehigh absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e, the cleaning wipes can absorb liquids and, according to product specifications, are also suitable for absorbing oil. The cleaning rags are particularly practical for removing \u003cstrong\u003ecoarse dirt\u003c\/strong\u003e and for general cleaning work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSuitable for general cleaning tasks\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight, absorbent \u003cstrong\u003eknitted jersey fabric with seams\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eParticularly suitable for \u003cstrong\u003epicking up coarse dirt\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e for reliable liquid absorption\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e for practical work applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003eoil absorption\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePleasant feel and high volume\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for regular use in the workplace\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTerry cloth cleaning rags for coarse dirt\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen cleaning tasks require picking up not only liquids but also \u003cstrong\u003ecoarse dirt\u003c\/strong\u003e, robust cleaning wipes are especially practical. The terry cloth cleaning rags are suitable for such applications and can be used in a variety of ways for wiping, absorbing, and cleaning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe size of approx. \u003cstrong\u003e50 × 50 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a generous working surface. At the same time, the high volume ensures comfortable handling for various cleaning tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical bulk pack:\u003c\/strong\u003e The cleaning rags are supplied as \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e. With 30 packaging units per pallet, they are also suitable for companies and commercial users with a regular need for cleaning wipes.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHigh absorbency and good tear resistance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of \u003cstrong\u003ehigh absorbency and high tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e makes these colored cleaning rags a versatile aid for cleaning work. The cotton knit material has a good feel and high volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhether for general cleaning, picking up coarse dirt, or absorbing oil: The \u003cstrong\u003ecolored terry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e can be used flexibly in everyday work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCotton knit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCloth length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 50 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCloth width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 50 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAbsorbency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTear resistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOil absorption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFeel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eService life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFor general cleaning tasks and suitable for picking up coarse dirt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePackaging information\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompressed bale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight per packaging unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions of packaging (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 × 22 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging units per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Colored terry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the colored terry cloth cleaning rags suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are suitable for \u003cstrong\u003egeneral cleaning tasks\u003c\/strong\u003e and in particular for picking up coarse dirt. They can be used in a versatile manner in commercial, craft, and industrial sectors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the cleaning rags suitable for coarse dirt?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. According to product specifications, the cleaning rags are \u003cstrong\u003eparticularly suitable for picking up coarse dirt\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be used for rough cleaning work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large are the individual cleaning rags?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe individual wipes are approx. \u003cstrong\u003e50 × 50 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e in size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the cleaning rags made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are made of \u003cstrong\u003ecotton knit\u003c\/strong\u003e, or a lightweight, absorbent knitted jersey fabric with seams.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the cleaning rags absorb oil?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In the product specifications, \u003cstrong\u003eoil absorption is stated as Yes\u003c\/strong\u003e. The high absorbency supports their use in such cleaning tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\" open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow are the cleaning rags delivered?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are delivered as \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e. The dimensions of the packaging are approx. 40 × 40 × 22 cm. There are 30 packaging units per pallet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür eignen sich die bunten Frottee-Putzlappen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen eignen sich für universelle Reinigungsarbeiten und insbesondere zum Aufnehmen von Grobschmutz. Sie können vielseitig im gewerblichen, handwerklichen und betrieblichen Bereich eingesetzt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind die Putzlappen für Grobschmutz geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Putzlappen sind gemäss Produktspezifikation besonders für das Aufnehmen von Grobschmutz geeignet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross sind die einzelnen Putzlappen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die einzelnen Tücher haben eine Grösse von ca. 50 × 50 cm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material bestehen die Putzlappen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen bestehen aus Baumwollstrick beziehungsweise einem leichten, saugfähigen Trikotgewirke mit Nähten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Können die Putzlappen Öl aufnehmen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. In den Produktspezifikationen ist die Ölaufnahme mit Ja angegeben. Die hohe Saugkraft unterstützt den Einsatz bei entsprechenden Reinigungsarbeiten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie werden die Putzlappen geliefert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen werden als 10-kg-Pressballen geliefert. Die Masse der Verpackung beträgt ca. 40 × 40 × 22 cm. Pro Palette sind 30 Verpackungseinheiten vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156373623131,"sku":"9.520-1","price":713.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Putzlappen-bunt-Frottee-scaled.jpg?v=1790088511"},{"product_id":"250kg-putzlappen-trikot-bunt-50x-pressballe-a-5kg","title":"250 kg cleaning rags, colored jersey, 50 x 5 kg compressed bales","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eColoured jersey cleaning rags 50 x 5 kg pressed bales\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThese \u003cstrong\u003ecoloured cleaning rags made of jersey knit fabric\u003c\/strong\u003e are a robust and absorbent solution for particularly heavy-duty cleaning and maintenance tasks. The medium-weight to heavy cotton knit fabric impresses with its high tear resistance and high absorbency, making it particularly suitable for absorbing \u003cstrong\u003eoils, lubricants, and coarse dirt\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIdeal for production, workshops, and demanding cleaning tasks:\u003c\/strong\u003e These coloured jersey cleaning rags are suitable for universal use and, in particular, wherever robust and absorbent cleaning cloths are required.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRobust cleaning rags for heavy-duty cleaning tasks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003ecoloured jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e were developed for demanding cleaning tasks. The medium-weight to heavy jersey knit fabric is absorbent, durable, and, thanks to its stitched finish, particularly suitable for practical use in industrial operations.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThanks to their \u003cstrong\u003ehigh tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e, the cloths can also be used for vigorous scrubbing and wiping. At the same time, their high absorbency ensures that liquids, oils, and lubricants can be reliably soaked up.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSuitable for particularly heavy-duty cleaning tasks\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMedium-weight to heavy, absorbent \u003cstrong\u003ejersey knit fabric with seams\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e for demanding applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e for soaking up liquids\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for absorbing \u003cstrong\u003eoils and lubricants\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eIdeal for the \u003cstrong\u003eproduction area\u003c\/strong\u003e and commercial applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003euniversal use\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMay contain plush\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile use in operations, workshops, and production\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe coloured jersey cleaning rags are versatile \u003cstrong\u003ecleaning cloths for trade, craft, and industry\u003c\/strong\u003e. They are particularly suitable for coarse and heavy-duty cleaning tasks as well as for cleaning jobs where high absorbency and good tear resistance are required.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn the \u003cstrong\u003eproduction area\u003c\/strong\u003e, for example, the cleaning rags can be used to soak up oils and lubricants or to clean work surfaces, machines, and equipment. These robust cloths are also a practical aid in workshops and for general cleaning tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e The cleaning rags are made of coloured jersey fabric. When working on sensitive surfaces, you should check in advance whether the colour or texture of the respective cloth is suitable for the intended use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHigh absorbency and tear resistance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nA key advantage of these \u003cstrong\u003ejersey cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e is the combination of high absorbency and high tear resistance. This allows the cloths to be used both for absorbing liquids and for vigorous cleaning work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe cotton knit material offers a pleasant feel and high volume. Its robust design supports reliable use during coarse and heavy cleaning tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCotton knit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCloth length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eapprox. 30 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCloth width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eapprox. 60 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAbsorbency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTear resistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOil absorption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFeel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDurability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFor coarse and heavy-duty cleaning and maintenance work\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePackaging information\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePressed bale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight per sales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePackage dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e38 × 34 × 10 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSales units per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e50\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Coloured jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the coloured jersey cleaning rags suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe cleaning rags are suitable for \u003cstrong\u003ecoarse and heavy-duty cleaning and maintenance tasks\u003c\/strong\u003e. They are particularly practical for use in production and workshop environments as well as for absorbing oils and lubricants.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan these cleaning rags be used to soak up oil and lubricants?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nYes. According to the product specifications, the cleaning rags have \u003cstrong\u003eoil absorption\u003c\/strong\u003e properties and high absorbency. They are therefore suitable for soaking up oils and lubricants in commercial and industrial settings.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the size of the individual cleaning rags?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe individual cloths are approximately \u003cstrong\u003e30 × 60 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e in size.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the cleaning rags made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe cleaning rags are made of \u003cstrong\u003ecotton knit\u003c\/strong\u003e, also known as jersey knit fabric.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow are the cleaning rags delivered?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe cleaning rags are delivered as \u003cstrong\u003e5 kg pressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e. The package dimensions are approx. 38 × 34 × 10 cm. 50 units per pallet are planned.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the cleaning rags contain plush?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nYes. According to the product information, \u003cstrong\u003ethey may contain plush\u003c\/strong\u003e. The cleaning rags are made of coloured jersey fabric and are intended for coarse and heavy-duty cleaning tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür eignen sich die Putzlappen Trikot bunt?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen eignen sich für grobe und schwere Putz- und Reinigungsarbeiten. Besonders praktisch sind sie im Produktions- und Werkstattbereich sowie für die Aufnahme von Ölen und Schmierstoffen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann man mit den Putzlappen Öl und Schmierstoffe aufnehmen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Putzlappen verfügen über eine Ölaufnahme und eine hohe Saugkraft und eignen sich daher für das Aufnehmen von Ölen und Schmierstoffen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross sind die einzelnen Putzlappen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die einzelnen Tücher haben eine Grösse von ca. 30 × 60 cm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material bestehen die Putzlappen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen bestehen aus Baumwollstrick beziehungsweise Trikotgewirke.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie werden die Putzlappen geliefert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Putzlappen werden als 5-kg-Pressballen geliefert. Die Verpackung misst ca. 38 × 34 × 10 cm. Pro Palette sind 50 Verpackungseinheiten vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann Plüsch in den Putzlappen enthalten sein?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Gemäss Produktangabe kann Plüsch enthalten sein.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156384010587,"sku":"9.219-1","price":514.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Putzlappen-Trikot-bunt-5kg.avif?v=1790088516"},{"product_id":"500kg-putzlappen-trikot-bunt-100x-pressballe-a-5kg","title":"500 kg cleaning rags, multi-colored jersey, 100 x 5 kg compressed bales","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description {\n  color: #333;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eColored Jersey Cleaning Rags 100 x 5 kg Compressed Bales\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDurable, absorbent jersey cleaning rags for heavy-duty cleaning, oil absorption, and use in production areas.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ecolored jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e are designed for particularly heavy-duty scrubbing and cleaning work. The medium-heavy to heavy, absorbent jersey knit with seams offers \u003cstrong\u003ehigh tear resistance and high absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes these cleaning rags especially suitable for universal use as well as for soaking up \u003cstrong\u003eoils and lubricants\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to their robust design, these cleaning rags are a practical aid for demanding cleaning tasks. They can be used for a variety of cleaning and absorption tasks, especially in \u003cstrong\u003eproduction areas\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor heavy-duty cleaning and production environments:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe combination of medium-heavy to heavy jersey knit, high absorbency, and high tear resistance makes these cleaning rags a versatile tool when \u003cstrong\u003eoils, lubricants, and coarse dirt\u003c\/strong\u003e need to be absorbed.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe main advantages of the colored jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor heavy-duty cleaning:\u003c\/strong\u003e Suitable for coarse and demanding cleaning tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMedium-heavy to heavy:\u003c\/strong\u003e Absorbent jersey knit with seams.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh absorbency:\u003c\/strong\u003e Practical for soaking up liquids and dirt.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh tear resistance:\u003c\/strong\u003e Durable construction for daily professional use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOil absorption:\u003c\/strong\u003e Suitable for soaking up oils and lubricants.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor production areas:\u003c\/strong\u003e Particularly practical for industrial and commercial cleaning tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUniversally applicable:\u003c\/strong\u003e For various scrubbing, cleaning, and absorption tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e5 kg compressed bale:\u003c\/strong\u003e Practical sales unit for businesses with regular consumption.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCleaning rags for particularly heavy-duty cleaning tasks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ecolored jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e are specially designed for heavy and coarse cleaning work. The medium-heavy to heavy jersey knit is absorbent while remaining tear-resistant, allowing the cleaning rags to be used for more demanding tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhether cleaning machines, workspaces, or production environments – these robust cleaning rags can be used for a wide range of cleaning duties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIdeal for absorbing oil and lubricants\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA primary application area for these \u003cstrong\u003ecolored jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e is the absorption of \u003cstrong\u003eoils and lubricants\u003c\/strong\u003e. Their high absorbency facilitates the collection of liquids, making the rags particularly valuable in work areas where oily contaminants are prevalent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor production and workshops:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThese cleaning rags are especially suitable for workspaces where \u003cstrong\u003eoils, lubricants, and coarse dirt\u003c\/strong\u003e must be removed on a regular basis.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRobust jersey knit with seams\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe material consists of \u003cstrong\u003ecotton knit\u003c\/strong\u003e. The medium-heavy to heavy jersey knit is constructed with seams and provides high tear resistance, making these rags suitable for regular and demanding cleaning work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe product may also \u003cstrong\u003econtain plush\u003c\/strong\u003e. The composition is therefore designed for versatile use as industrial and commercial cleaning rags.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile use in production areas\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVarious cleaning tasks frequently arise in \u003cstrong\u003eproduction areas\u003c\/strong\u003e. The colored jersey cleaning rags can be used for absorbing oil, lubricants, liquids, and dirt, as well as for general cleaning work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of absorbency and tear resistance makes them particularly suitable for workstations where a robust and absorbent cleaning cloth is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable areas of application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSuitable usage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProduction area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAbsorption of oil, lubricants, and general dirt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy-duty scrubbing and cleaning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustry\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUniversal cleaning and absorption tasks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery areas\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAbsorption of oils and lubricants\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCrafts\/Trades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCoarse and demanding cleaning tasks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCommercial businesses\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eVersatile use as an absorbent cleaning rag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCotton knit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDesign\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eColored, medium-heavy to heavy\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJersey knit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAbsorbent, with seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpecial feature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMay contain plush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCloth length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 30 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCloth width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 60 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAbsorbency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTear resistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOil absorption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFeel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eService life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFor coarse and heavy-duty scrubbing and cleaning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePackaging information\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompressed bale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight per sales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e38 × 34 × 10 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging units per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e100\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePractical 5 kg compressed bales\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are sold as \u003cstrong\u003e5 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e, making them suitable for businesses that regularly require larger quantities of cleaning cloths. The compact packaging is easy to store and can be used for ongoing work requirements as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a packaging size of \u003cstrong\u003e38 × 34 × 10 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the compressed bale is compact and space-saving. There are 100 packaging units per pallet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho are the colored jersey cleaning rags suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe colored jersey cleaning rags are particularly suitable for \u003cstrong\u003eproduction facilities, workshops, industrial companies, trade businesses, and commercial enterprises\u003c\/strong\u003e. They are useful wherever robust and absorbent cleaning rags are required for coarse and heavy-duty cleaning tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the colored jersey cleaning rags suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are especially suitable for coarse and heavy-duty scrubbing and cleaning tasks. They can be used universally and are particularly suitable for production and workshop areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the cleaning rags suitable for oil and lubricants?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Oil absorption is listed as \"Yes\" in the product specifications. The cleaning rags are therefore suitable for absorbing oils and lubricants.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the jersey knit?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe jersey knit is described as \u003cstrong\u003emedium-heavy to heavy\u003c\/strong\u003e and is constructed with seams.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the cleaning rags contain plush?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. According to the product specifications, they may contain plush.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large are the individual cleaning rags?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags have a length of approx. \u003cstrong\u003e30 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a width of approx. \u003cstrong\u003e60 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow absorbent are the jersey cleaning rags?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAbsorbency is stated as \u003cstrong\u003ehigh\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes the cleaning rags particularly suitable for absorbing liquids, oils, and lubricants.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the cleaning rags tear-resistant?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Tear resistance is stated as \u003cstrong\u003ehigh\u003c\/strong\u003e, making the cleaning rags suitable for demanding cleaning tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich areas are these cleaning rags particularly suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are particularly suitable for \u003cstrong\u003eproduction areas\u003c\/strong\u003e, workshops, industry, trade, and other commercial work areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow are the cleaning rags sold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are sold as \u003cstrong\u003e5 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the packaging?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe packaging has dimensions of approx. \u003cstrong\u003e38 × 34 × 10 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many packaging units are on a pallet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere are \u003cstrong\u003e100 packaging units\u003c\/strong\u003e per pallet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy colored jersey cleaning rags 5 kg at baustore.ch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ecolored jersey cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e are a robust and versatile solution for particularly heavy-duty cleaning tasks. Their high absorbency and tear resistance, as well as their suitability for absorbing \u003cstrong\u003eoils and lubricants\u003c\/strong\u003e, make them a practical aid in production, workshops, industry, and trade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAt a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eColored jersey cleaning rags · Cotton knit · medium-heavy to heavy · approx. 30 × 60 cm · high absorbency · high tear resistance · oil absorption · suitable for oil and lubricants · for heavy-duty cleaning · 5 kg compressed bale\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156395118939,"sku":"9.219-2","price":919.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Putzlappen-Trikot-bunt-5kg_5a2e035b-ea07-44b5-a4c3-c73fcedc0e06.avif?v=1790088522"},{"product_id":"600kg-putzlappen-frottee-bunt-60x-pressballe-a-10kg","title":"600 kg colored terry cloth rags, 60 x 10 kg compressed bales","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description {\n  color: #333;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMulti-colored terry cloth cleaning rags, 60 x 10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAbsorbent and tear-resistant terry cloth cleaning rags made of cotton knit for universal cleaning tasks and for absorbing coarse dirt.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003emulti-colored terry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e are versatile cleaning cloths for professional and commercial use. The lightweight, absorbent knitted fabric with seams is characterized by \u003cstrong\u003ehigh absorbency and tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e and is particularly suitable for general cleaning tasks as well as for absorbing coarse dirt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to their absorbent cotton structure, the cleaning rags can be used for various cleaning tasks. At the same time, the material offers high tear resistance and a pleasant feel, making the cloths practical aids in the daily workflow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical cleaning solution for daily use:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe terry cloth cleaning rags are offered as \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e and are suitable for workshops, commercial businesses, cleaning jobs, and numerous other applications where absorbent and durable cleaning rags are required.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe most important advantages of the terry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh absorbency:\u003c\/strong\u003e Suitable for absorbing liquids and dirt.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh tear resistance:\u003c\/strong\u003e Durable material for daily use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCotton knit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Absorbent jersey knitted fabric with seams.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSuitable for coarse dirt:\u003c\/strong\u003e Practical for demanding cleaning tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUniversally applicable:\u003c\/strong\u003e For a wide variety of cleaning tasks in operations, workshops, and trade.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOil absorption:\u003c\/strong\u003e Suitable for applications where oil also needs to be absorbed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLarge sales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Supplied as a 10 kg compressed bale.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCleaning rags for universal cleaning tasks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe multi-colored \u003cstrong\u003eterry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e are suitable for a multitude of cleaning tasks. For example, they can be used to absorb dirt, liquids, or other grime, making them a practical addition to daily cleaning requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA larger quantity of cleaning rags is particularly useful for regular cleaning tasks. Through delivery as \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e, a correspondingly large quantity of cleaning cloths is available for ongoing needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHigh absorbency for liquids and dirt\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn essential feature of the terry cloth cleaning rags is their \u003cstrong\u003ehigh absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e. The absorbent knitted fabric can absorb liquids and thereby supports quick and practical cleaning of work surfaces and other soiled areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAlso for absorbing coarse dirt:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe cleaning rags are not only suitable for general cleaning tasks but also for absorbing \u003cstrong\u003ecoarse dirt\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows them to be used flexibly in different work areas.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTear-resistant cleaning rags for daily use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to high absorbency, the cleaning rags possess \u003cstrong\u003ehigh tear resistance\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes them suitable for regular cleaning tasks where a durable cleaning cloth is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of absorbency, tear resistance, and a pleasant feel makes the terry cloth cleaning rags a versatile aid for daily cleaning needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable areas of application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSuitable use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAbsorbing dirt, liquids, and grime\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCommercial businesses\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUniversal cleaning tasks in daily operations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCleaning tasks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAbsorbing liquids and coarse dirt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustry and skilled trades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eVersatile cleaning rags for the workspace\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOil spills\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for applications involving oil absorption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCotton knit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCloth length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 50 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCloth width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 50 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAbsorbency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTear resistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOil absorption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFeel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eService life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFor universal cleaning tasks and for absorbing coarse dirt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSales unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompressed bale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight per packaging unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePackage dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 × 22 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging units per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e60\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePractical 10 kg compressed bales for business and operations\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e are particularly interesting for businesses that regularly require larger quantities of cleaning rags. The compact packaging facilitates storage and stocking, while the cleaning rags can be removed individually as needed and used for various cleaning tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a package size of \u003cstrong\u003e40 × 40 × 22 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the compressed bale can be stored to save space. 60 packaging units can be transported per pallet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho are the multi-colored terry cloth cleaning rags suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are particularly suitable for \u003cstrong\u003eworkshops, skilled trade businesses, commercial enterprises, industrial work areas, and professional cleaning applications\u003c\/strong\u003e. Wherever dirt, liquids, or coarse grime need to be removed regularly, these absorbent cotton cleaning rags can be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the terry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the multi-colored terry cloth cleaning rags suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are suitable for universal cleaning tasks as well as for absorbing coarse dirt. They can be used in workshops, commercial businesses, and other work areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the cleaning rags made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are made of \u003cstrong\u003ecotton knit\u003c\/strong\u003e or a lightweight, absorbent jersey knitted fabric with seams.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large are the individual cleaning rags?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags have a length of approx. \u003cstrong\u003e50 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a width of approx. \u003cstrong\u003e50 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the terry cloth cleaning rags absorbent?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The cleaning rags have \u003cstrong\u003ehigh absorbency\u003c\/strong\u003e and are therefore suitable for absorbing liquids and dirt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the cleaning rags tear-resistant?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tear resistance is stated as \u003cstrong\u003ehigh\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes the cleaning rags suitable for regular cleaning tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the cleaning rags absorb oil?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In the product specifications, \u003cstrong\u003eoil absorption is listed as \"Yes\"\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow are the cleaning rags sold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are sold as \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg compressed bales\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the packaging?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe packaging has dimensions of approx. \u003cstrong\u003e40 × 40 × 22 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many compressed bales are on a pallet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere are \u003cstrong\u003e60 packaging units\u003c\/strong\u003e on a pallet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich businesses are the cleaning rags suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleaning rags are particularly suitable for workshops, skilled trade and commercial businesses, industrial work areas, and for general professional cleaning tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy terry cloth cleaning rags, multi-colored, 10 kg at baustore.ch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003emulti-colored terry cloth cleaning rags\u003c\/strong\u003e are a versatile solution for daily cleaning needs. High absorbency, high tear resistance, oil absorption, and suitability for absorbing coarse dirt make them practical cleaning cloths for a wide variety of work areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAt a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eTerry cloth cleaning rags · multi-colored · cotton knit · approx. 50 × 50 cm · high absorbency · high tear resistance · oil absorption · suitable for coarse dirt · 10 kg compressed bale\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156403605851,"sku":"9.520-2","price":1232.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Putzlappen-bunt-Frottee-scaled_b323dff6-50e5-4434-a369-453b0e2576e3.jpg?v=1790088528"},{"product_id":"abdeckvlies-180g-m2-protect-it-50-meter-rolle-24-rollen-pro-palette","title":"Protect-it protective fleece 180g\/m2 - 50-meter roll","description":"\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArea of application\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003eFor covering dry floors such as parquet, laminate, carpet, tiles, synthetic floor coverings, etc. For protecting objects such as stairs with railings, furniture, windows, and doors. Do not use on freshly laid clay and porous stone tiles.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProperties\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003equick and easy to cover\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003eslip-resistant surfaces\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003ereusable\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003eprotects against mechanical damage\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n \t\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003efilm prevents the penetration of liquids such as water and paint\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003eCarrier 100% polyester fleece\nBasis weight 180 g\/m²\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSupply form\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003eRolls of 50 m\nWidth 100 cm\n24 rolls \/ pallet\n\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eApplication\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003eLay the protective fleece in strips with an overlap of approx. 5 cm. Seal these tightly with a suitable adhesive tape (e.g., concrete fabric tape).\nFor multiple uses of the protective fleece, it must not be soiled. Preliminary tests are recommended for sensitive surfaces.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNotes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: #1f1f1f;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: Arial, serif;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: small;\"\u003e\u003cspan lang=\"de-DE\"\u003eThe information corresponds to the current state of development. It does not claim to be exhaustive. Proper and therefore successful processing of the products is beyond our control. A warranty can therefore only be assumed for the quality of the products, not for the processing. It is the user's responsibility to determine the suitability of our products for their intended purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended. \u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n ","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156463800667,"sku":"9.014-3","price":54.95,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/9.014-Abdeckvlies-180gm2-1-scaled_ae81ab4a-4306-41f9-a4e5-1718e4daf6ba.jpg?v=1790088561"},{"product_id":"stelzlager-25-40mm-mp1","title":"Adjustable pedestal 25 - 40mm MP1","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable pedestal 25–40 mm for terrace tiles MP1, height-adjustable\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals for outdoor terrace tiles\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable MP1 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are suitable for laying terrace tiles in outdoor areas. With an adjustment range of \u003cstrong\u003e25 to 40 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, they allow for flexible adaptation of the installation height. The robust pedestals, made of polypropylene and rubber, feature integrated spacing tabs and are suitable for various joint widths.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP1 pedestal\u003c\/strong\u003e has a base diameter of 195 mm and a head diameter of 115 mm. The spacing tabs are available in thicknesses of \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be snapped off if required. This allows the pedestals to also be used for edge areas or for installations without joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe most important features of the MP1 pedestal:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eHeight-adjustable from \u003cstrong\u003e25 to 40 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, suitable for outdoor terrace tiles, includes spacing tabs in various thicknesses, and manufactured from \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/strong\u003e. According to the product specifications, the height can also be adjusted after installation using an adjustment key.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals 25–40 mm\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP1 pedestal\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for a height range of 25 to 40 mm. The height-adjustable design allows the support height to be adjusted according to the requirements when laying terrace tiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are placed directly onto the installation surface. According to the provided product information, \u003cstrong\u003eno adhesive or additional fasteners\u003c\/strong\u003e are required for positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpacing tabs for terrace tiles\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals for stone and ceramic installations feature \u003cstrong\u003espacing tabs with a thickness of 2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The spacing tabs can be snapped off. This means the pedestals can also be used for \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas or for installations without joints\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe different spacing tab thicknesses allow for adaptation to various requirements when laying terrace tiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTop caps for timber decking\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor timber decking, \u003cstrong\u003etop caps with a height of 24 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e are provided according to the product specifications. This expands the range of applications for the pedestals depending on the type of installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight adjustment after installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith the help of an \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e, height adjustment after installation is also possible according to the product specifications. This allows the height of the pedestals to be adjusted retrospectively if necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data for the MP1 pedestal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMP1 pedestal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e25–40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBase diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e195 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHead diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBase thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJoint height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJoint thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e2, 3, 4 and 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e175 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCentral compressive strength limit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e19.52 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEccentric compressive strength limit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e11.35 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial properties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRecyclable, non-hazardous\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial and properties\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP1 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are made of polypropylene and rubber. According to the product information provided, the material is \u003cstrong\u003erecyclable and non-hazardous\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a weight of 175 g and a base diameter of 195 mm, the pedestals are designed for the intended installation of terrace tiles. The specified central compressive strength limit is \u003cstrong\u003e19.52 kN\u003c\/strong\u003e, and the limit for eccentric load is \u003cstrong\u003e11.35 kN\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePositioning the pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestal is simply placed on the installation surface. According to the product specifications, \u003cstrong\u003eno adhesive or fasteners\u003c\/strong\u003e are required for positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePackaging\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003ePackaging\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eQuantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePer box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e36 pedestals\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet, 220 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e44 boxes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet, 270 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e54 boxes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich terraces is the MP1 pedestal suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable MP1 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are intended for laying terrace tiles in outdoor areas. Depending on the installation situation, the spacing tabs can be used or snapped off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the product description, this also makes the pedestals suitable for \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas and installations without joints\u003c\/strong\u003e. Additionally, top caps with a height of 24 mm are specified for timber decking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the MP1 pedestal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the adjustment range of the MP1 pedestal?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe MP1 pedestal is height-adjustable from \u003cstrong\u003e25 to 40 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat applications is the MP1 pedestal suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestal is intended for \u003cstrong\u003elaying terrace tiles in outdoor areas\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich joint widths are possible with the MP1 pedestal?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated spacing tabs are available in thicknesses of \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. They can be snapped off if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the pedestal also be used for edge areas?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The spacing tabs can be snapped off so that the pedestal can also be used for \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas or installations without joints\u003c\/strong\u003e according to the product specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the height be adjusted after installation?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. According to the product information, height adjustment is possible after installation using an \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the pedestal positioned on the installation surface?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestal is simply placed on the installation surface. According to the product information, \u003cstrong\u003eno adhesive or additional fasteners\u003c\/strong\u003e are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many pedestals are in a box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne box contains \u003cstrong\u003e36 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high are the top caps for timber decking?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the product specifications, \u003cstrong\u003etop caps with a height of 24 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e are provided for timber decking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eData sheet for the MP1 pedestal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFurther technical information can be found in the \u003cbr\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Datenblatt-zu-Terrassenplatten-Stelzlager.pdf?v=1790602749\" title=\"Data sheet for pedestal\"\u003edata sheet for terrace tile pedestals as a PDF.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNotes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe information provided reflects the current state of development and does not claim to be exhaustive. Professional and successful processing of the products is beyond our control. Therefore, a warranty can only be provided for the quality of the products, not for their application. It is the user's responsibility to determine the suitability of our products for their specific purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Von welcher Höhe bis zu welcher Höhe ist das Stelzlager MP1 verstellbar?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager MP1 ist von 25 bis 40 mm höhenverstellbar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Anwendungen ist das Stelzlager MP1 geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager ist für die Verlegung von Terrassenplatten im Aussenbereich vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Fugenbreiten sind mit dem Stelzlager MP1 möglich?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die integrierten Fugenkreuze sind in den Stärken 2, 3, 4 und 5 mm ausgeführt. Sie können bei Bedarf abgebrochen werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann das Stelzlager auch für Randbereiche verwendet werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Fugenkreuze können abgebrochen werden, sodass das Stelzlager gemäss Produktangaben auch für Randbereiche oder eine Verlegung ohne Fugen eingesetzt werden kann.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Höhe nach der Montage noch angepasst werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Mit Hilfe des Regulierungsschlüssels ist laut Produktangaben auch eine Höheneinstellung nach der Montage möglich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie wird das Stelzlager auf der Verlegefläche positioniert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager wird einfach auf die Verlegefläche gelegt. Gemäss den Produktangaben ist dafür kein Klebstoff und keine zusätzliche Befestigung erforderlich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viele Stelzlager befinden sich in einem Karton?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ein Karton enthält 36 Stelzlager.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch sind die Aufsatzkappen für die Holzverlegung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Für die Holzverlegung sind gemäss den Produktangaben Aufsatzkappen mit einer Höhe von 24 mm angegeben.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156482380123,"sku":"9.548","price":2.27,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stelzlager-fuer-Terrassen-und-Keramikplatten-MP1.jpg?v=1790088573"},{"product_id":"stelzlager-40-70mm-mp2","title":"Adjustable pedestal 40 - 70mm MP2","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description details summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable pedestal 40–70 mm for patio tiles MP2, height-adjustable\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals for patio tiles in outdoor areas\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable MP2 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are suitable for laying patio tiles outdoors. The specified adjustment range is \u003cstrong\u003e40 to 70 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. These robust pedestals made of polypropylene and rubber feature spacer tabs in various thicknesses, enabling the flexible installation of patio tiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a \u003cstrong\u003ebase diameter of 195 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003ehead diameter of 115 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the pedestals are designed to support patio tiles. The integrated spacer tabs are available in thicknesses of \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4 and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be snapped off if required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eKey features at a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable from \u003cstrong\u003e40 to 70 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFor outdoor patio tiles\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBase diameter: \u003cstrong\u003e195 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eHead diameter: \u003cstrong\u003e115 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSpacer tabs with \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4 and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e thickness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMade of \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRecyclable material\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eNo glue or fasteners required for positioning\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals 40–70 mm\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP2 pedestal\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a height adjustment range of 40 to 70 mm. This allows the height of the support to be adjusted according to the requirements when laying patio tiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are placed directly onto the prepared installation surface. According to the product information provided, \u003cstrong\u003eno glue or additional fastening\u003c\/strong\u003e is required for positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpacer tabs for patio tiles\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals for stone and ceramic paving feature \u003cstrong\u003espacer tabs with 2, 3, 4 and 5 mm thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e. The spacer tabs can be snapped off. This allows the pedestals to also be used for \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas or for installation without joints\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight adjustment after installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the product information, height adjustment is also possible after installation using the \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the height of the pedestals to be subsequently adjusted if necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePedestal MP2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40–70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBase diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e195 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHead diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBase thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJoint height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJoint thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e2, 3, 4 and 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e220 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCentral compressive strength limit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e19.52 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLimit resistance for eccentric compressive load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e11.35 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial properties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRecyclable, non-hazardous\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial and properties\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP2 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are made of polypropylene and rubber. According to the product information, this is \u003cstrong\u003erecyclable and non-hazardous material\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePositioning the pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestal is simply placed onto the installation surface. According to the information provided, \u003cstrong\u003eno glue or fastening\u003c\/strong\u003e is required for positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSupply form\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003ePackaging\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eQuantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePer box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e36 pedestals\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet, 220 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e30 boxes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet, 270 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e36 boxes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich patios are they suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the product description, the \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable MP2 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are intended for laying patio tiles in outdoor areas. Thanks to the snap-off spacer tabs, they can also be used in edge areas or for installations without joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the MP2 pedestal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the adjustment height range of the MP2 pedestal?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the technical specifications, the MP2 pedestal is height-adjustable from \u003cstrong\u003e40 to 70 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat applications is the MP2 pedestal suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestal is intended for the \u003cstrong\u003einstallation of patio tiles in outdoor areas\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat joint widths are possible?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe spacer tabs are designed in thicknesses of \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4 and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. They can be snapped off so that the pedestal can also be used for edge areas or for installation without joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the height be adjusted after installation?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. According to the product information, height adjustment is possible after installation with the help of an \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the pedestal positioned on the installation surface?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestal is simply placed onto the installation surface. According to the product information, \u003cstrong\u003eno glue or additional fastening\u003c\/strong\u003e is required for this.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many pedestals are included in a box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne box contains \u003cstrong\u003e36 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eData sheet for the MP2 pedestal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFurther technical information can be found in the \u003cbr\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Datenblatt-zu-Terrassenplatten-Stelzlager.pdf?v=1790602749\" title=\"Data sheet for pedestals\"\u003edata sheet for patio tile pedestals as a PDF.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNotes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe information corresponds to the current state of development and makes no claim to completeness. Professional and therefore successful processing of the products is beyond our control. A warranty can therefore only be assumed for the quality of the products, but not for the processing. It is the user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the products for their intended purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Von welcher Höhe bis zu welcher Höhe ist das Stelzlager MP2 verstellbar?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager MP2 ist laut den technischen Angaben von 40 bis 70 mm höhenverstellbar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Anwendungen ist das Stelzlager MP2 geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager ist für die Verlegung von Terrassenplatten im Aussenbereich vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Fugenbreiten sind möglich?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Fugenkreuze sind in den Stärken 2, 3, 4 und 5 mm ausgeführt. Sie können abgebrochen werden, sodass das Stelzlager auch für Randbereiche oder eine Verlegung ohne Fugen verwendet werden kann.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Höhe nach der Montage noch angepasst werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Laut Produktangaben ist mit Hilfe eines Regulierungsschlüssels auch eine Höheneinstellung nach der Montage möglich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie wird das Stelzlager auf der Verlegefläche positioniert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager wird einfach auf die Verlegefläche gelegt. Gemäss den Produktangaben ist dafür kein Klebstoff und keine zusätzliche Befestigung erforderlich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viele Stelzlager sind in einem Karton enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ein Karton enthält 36 Stelzlager.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156489654619,"sku":"9.549","price":2.91,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stelzlager-fuer-Terrassen-und-Keramikplatten-MP2.jpg?v=1790088578"},{"product_id":"stelzlager-60-100mm-mp3","title":"Adjustable pedestal 60 - 100mm MP3","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description details summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable Pedestal 60–100 mm for Patio Pavers MP3, height-adjustable\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals for outdoor patio pavers\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable MP3 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are suitable for installing patio pavers outdoors. The adjustment range is \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 100 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The robust pedestals made of polypropylene and rubber allow for flexible positioning of patio pavers and feature spacer tabs in various thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a \u003cstrong\u003ebase diameter of 195 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003ehead diameter of 115 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the pedestals provide a defined support surface for laying patio pavers. The spacer tabs are available in thicknesses of \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be adjusted accordingly for edge areas or for installation without joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant features at a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable from \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 100 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFor outdoor patio pavers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBase diameter: \u003cstrong\u003e195 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eHead diameter: \u003cstrong\u003e115 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSpacer tabs with \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e thickness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMade of \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRecyclable material\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eNo gluing or additional fastening required for positioning\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals 60–100 mm\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP3 pedestal\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for a height range of 60 to 100 mm. This allows the height of the support to be adjusted according to the requirements of the patio paver installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are placed on the prepared installation surface. According to the provided product specifications, \u003cstrong\u003eno adhesive or additional fastening\u003c\/strong\u003e is required for positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpacer tabs for different joint widths\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals for stone and ceramic installation have integrated \u003cstrong\u003espacer tabs with 2, 3, 4, and 5 mm thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e. The spacer tabs can be broken off. This allows the pedestals to be used for \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas or for installation without joints\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight adjustment after installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to product specifications, height adjustment after installation is also possible with the help of the \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the height of the pedestals to be adjusted subsequently if required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMP3 pedestal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e60–100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBase diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e195 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHead diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBase thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJoint height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJoint thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e270 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCentral load-bearing capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e19.52 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad-bearing capacity for eccentric load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e11.35 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial properties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRecyclable, non-hazardous\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial and properties\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe MP3 pedestals are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/strong\u003e. According to the product specifications, the material is recyclable and non-hazardous.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePositioning the pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe product is simply placed on the installation surface. According to the available information, \u003cstrong\u003eno adhesive and no additional fastening\u003c\/strong\u003e is required for positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePackaging\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003ePackaging\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eQuantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePer carton\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e36 pedestals\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet, 220 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e20 cartons\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet, 270 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e24 cartons\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable for which patios?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable MP3 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are intended for installing patio pavers outdoors according to the product description. The spacer tabs allow for different joint widths and can be removed for edge areas or for installation without joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the MP3 pedestal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the adjustment range of the MP3 pedestal?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the technical specifications, the MP3 pedestal is height-adjustable from \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 100 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eFor which applications is the MP3 pedestal suitable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestal is intended for the \u003cstrong\u003einstallation of patio pavers outdoors\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat joint widths are possible?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe spacer tabs are available in thicknesses of \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. They can be broken off so that the pedestal can also be used for edge areas or for installation without joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the pedestal positioned?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestal is simply placed on the installation surface. According to the product specifications, \u003cstrong\u003eno adhesive or fastening\u003c\/strong\u003e is required for positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the height be adjusted after installation?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. According to product specifications, height adjustment after installation is also possible using an \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many pedestals are in a carton?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne carton contains \u003cstrong\u003e36 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eData sheet for the MP3 pedestal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFurther technical information can be found in the \u003cbr\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Datenblatt-zu-Terrassenplatten-Stelzlager.pdf?v=1790602749\" title=\"Datenblatt zu Stelzlager\"\u003edata sheet for patio paver pedestals as a PDF.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNotes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe information corresponds to the current state of development and does not claim to be exhaustive. Professional and successful processing of the products is beyond our control. A warranty can therefore only be given for the quality of the products, but not for their processing. It is the responsibility of the user to determine the suitability of the products for their specific purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Von welcher Höhe bis zu welcher Höhe ist das Stelzlager MP3 verstellbar?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager MP3 ist laut den technischen Angaben von 60 bis 100 mm höhenverstellbar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Anwendungen ist das Stelzlager MP3 geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager ist für die Verlegung von Terrassenplatten im Aussenbereich vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Fugenbreiten sind möglich?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Fugenkreuze sind in den Stärken 2, 3, 4 und 5 mm erhältlich. Sie können abgebrochen werden, sodass das Stelzlager auch für Randbereiche oder eine Verlegung ohne Fugen eingesetzt werden kann.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie wird das Stelzlager positioniert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Stelzlager wird einfach auf die Verlegefläche gelegt. Gemäss den Produktangaben ist für die Positionierung kein Klebstoff und keine Befestigung erforderlich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Höhe nach der Montage noch angepasst werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Laut Produktangaben ist mit einem Regulierungsschlüssel auch eine Höheneinstellung nach der Montage möglich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viele Stelzlager sind in einem Karton enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ein Karton enthält 36 Stelzlager.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156500009307,"sku":"9.550","price":3.67,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stelzlager-fuer-Terrassen-und-Keramikplatten-MP3.jpg?v=1790088584"},{"product_id":"stelzlager-90-160mm-mp4","title":"Adjustable pedestal 90 - 160mm MP4","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable Pedestal 90–160 mm for Patio Pavers MP4\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals for outdoor patio pavers\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable MP4 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are suitable for installing patio pavers in outdoor areas. The height of the pedestals can be adjusted from \u003cstrong\u003e90 to 160 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, providing a flexible substructure for stone and ceramic patio pavers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe robust pedestals made of \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/strong\u003e are simply placed on the intended installation surface. According to the provided product information, no gluing or additional fastening is required. The height adjustment allows the assembly height of the pedestals to be adapted to the specific installation situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible solution for raised terraces:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe MP4 pedestals allow for a height adjustment of 90 to 160 mm and are intended for the installation of outdoor patio pavers.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe main advantages of the MP4 pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable from 90 to 160 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e – flexible adjustment of the assembly height.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor patio pavers\u003c\/strong\u003e – suitable for installing stone and ceramic pavers in outdoor areas.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated spacer tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e – for joint widths of 2, 3, 4, and 5 mm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreakable spacer tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e – making them adaptable for edge areas or installation without joints.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSubsequent height adjustment possible\u003c\/strong\u003e – the height can be adjusted even after installation using the adjustment key.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust material\u003c\/strong\u003e – manufactured from polypropylene and rubber.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable material\u003c\/strong\u003e – the material used is recyclable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals for patio pavers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen laying patio pavers, \u003cstrong\u003epedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e can be used as support points for the pavers. The MP4 pedestals are designed for patio constructions with an assembly height of \u003cstrong\u003e90 to 160 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe height adjustment allows for flexible adaptation of each individual pedestal to the desired assembly height. This enables compensation for different installation surface levels and allows the patio pavers to be positioned on the pedestals accordingly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpacer tabs for stone and ceramic pavers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe MP4 pedestals feature \u003cstrong\u003espacer tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e for installing patio pavers. Depending on the desired joint width, joint thicknesses of \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e are available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe spacer tabs can be broken off. This allows the pedestals to be adapted for \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas\u003c\/strong\u003e or for installation without joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible adjustment:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThanks to the breakable spacer tabs, the pedestals can be adapted to different installation situations.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight adjustment even after installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe MP4 pedestals can be height-adjusted even after installation using the corresponding \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows for subsequent correction of the height of individual pedestals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe option for subsequent height adjustment simplifies installation and offers additional flexibility when aligning the patio pavers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePositioning the pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are simply placed on the intended \u003cstrong\u003einstallation surface\u003c\/strong\u003e. According to the provided product information, no gluing or additional fastening is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe patio pavers are then laid on the designated support points. The exact number and positioning of the pedestals depend on the specific patio construction and the patio pavers used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data for MP4 pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eModel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMP4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eHeight adjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e90 to 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eBase diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e195 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eHead diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eBase thickness\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eJoint height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eJoint thickness\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eWeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e335 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eCentral compressive strength limit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e19.52 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eEccentric compressive strength limit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e11.35 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial property\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRecyclable material, non-hazardous\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDelivery form\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eScope of delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e36 pieces of pedestals per box\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003ePackaging\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePedestals per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e36 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet variant 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e14 boxes per pallet – approx. 220 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet variant 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e16 boxes per pallet – approx. 270 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial and properties\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP4 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are manufactured from polypropylene and rubber. According to the provided product information, this is recyclable and non-hazardous material.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich terraces are the MP4 pedestals suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe height-adjustable MP4 pedestals are designed for \u003cstrong\u003einstalling outdoor patio pavers\u003c\/strong\u003e. According to the product information, they are suitable for stone and ceramic pavers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith their height range of \u003cstrong\u003e90 to 160 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the pedestals are intended for patio constructions that require a correspondingly increased assembly height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant for planning:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe required number and positioning of the pedestals should be planned according to the dimensions and properties of the patio pavers used, as well as the specific substructure.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about MP4 pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the height adjustment range of the MP4 pedestals?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP4 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are height-adjustable from \u003cstrong\u003e90 to 160 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich patio pavers are the MP4 pedestals suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are intended for the installation of \u003cstrong\u003eoutdoor patio pavers\u003c\/strong\u003e. According to the product information, they are suitable for stone and ceramic pavers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat joint widths are possible with these pedestals?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals feature spacer tabs for \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e joint thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the spacer tabs be broken off?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the spacer tabs can be broken off. This allows the pedestals to be adapted for, for example, \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas or installation without joints\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the height still be adjusted after installation?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, according to the product information, subsequent \u003cstrong\u003eheight adjustment with the adjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e is possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the MP4 pedestals made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/strong\u003e. The material is stated to be recyclable and non-hazardous.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the base diameter?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ebase diameter is 195 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The head diameter is 115 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does an MP4 pedestal weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the product information, an MP4 pedestal weighs \u003cstrong\u003e335 g\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow are the pedestals positioned?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are placed on the intended installation surface. According to the provided information, no gluing or additional fastening is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many pedestals are in a box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne box contains \u003cstrong\u003e36 pieces\u003c\/strong\u003e of pedestals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy 90–160 mm pedestals for patio pavers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP4 90–160 mm pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are a flexible solution for installing patio pavers in outdoor areas. The height adjustment, various joint thicknesses, and breakable spacer tabs allow for adaptation to different installation situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFurther technical information can be found in the detailed data sheet: \u003cbr\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Datenblatt-zu-Terrassenplatten-Stelzlager.pdf?v=1790602749\" title=\"Data sheet for pedestals\"\u003eData sheet for patio paver pedestals as PDF.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNote:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe information corresponds to the current state of development and does not claim to be exhaustive. Professional and successful processing of the products is beyond our control. Therefore, a guarantee can only be provided for the quality of the products, not for the workmanship. It is the user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the products for their specific purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c!-- FAQ Schema --\u003e \u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Von welcher bis zu welcher Höhe sind die Stelzlager MP4 verstellbar?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Stelzlager MP4 sind von 90 bis 160 mm höhenverstellbar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Terrassenplatten eignen sich die Stelzlager MP4?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Stelzlager sind für die Verlegung von Terrassenplatten im Aussenbereich vorgesehen. Gemäss den Produktangaben eignen sie sich für Stein- und Keramikplatten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Fugenbreiten sind mit den Stelzlagern möglich?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Stelzlager verfügen über Fugenkreuze für 2, 3, 4 und 5 mm Fugenstärke.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Können die Fugenkreuze abgebrochen werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Fugenkreuze lassen sich abbrechen. Dadurch können die Stelzlager beispielsweise für Randbereiche oder eine Verlegung ohne Fugen angepasst werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Höhe nach der Montage noch angepasst werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Gemäss den Produktangaben ist eine nachträgliche Höhenverstellung mit dem Regulierungsschlüssel möglich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material bestehen die Stelzlager MP4?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Stelzlager werden aus Polypropylen und Gummi hergestellt. Das Material wird als recyclebar und nicht gefährlich angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Basisdurchmesser?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Basisdurchmesser beträgt 195 mm. Der Kopfdurchmesser beträgt 115 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist ein Stelzlager MP4?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ein Stelzlager MP4 hat gemäss den Produktangaben ein Gewicht von 335 g.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156510757211,"sku":"9.551","price":4.54,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stelzlager-fuer-Terrassen-und-Keramikplatten-MP4.jpg?v=1790088590"},{"product_id":"stelzlager-150-270mm-mp5","title":"Adjustable pedestal 150 - 270mm MP5","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable pedestals 150–270 mm for patio tiles MP5\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals for outdoor patio tiles\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable MP5 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are suitable for laying patio tiles in outdoor areas. The pedestals can be adjusted in height from \u003cstrong\u003e150 to 270 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, thereby providing a flexible substructure for stone and ceramic patio tiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe robust pedestals made of \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/strong\u003e are simply placed on the prepared installation surface. According to the manufacturer's specifications, no gluing or additional fastening is required. The integrated height adjustment allows for the desired installation height to be set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIdeal for raised patios:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe MP5 pedestals allow for height adjustment from 150 to 270 mm and are intended for laying patio tiles in outdoor areas.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey advantages of the MP5 pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable from 150 to 270 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e – flexible adjustment of the installation height.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor patio tiles\u003c\/strong\u003e – suitable for laying stone and ceramic tiles in outdoor areas.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated spacer tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e – with joint widths of 2, 3, 4, and 5 mm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreakable spacer tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e – allowing them to be adapted for edge areas or for installations without joints.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight adjustment possible even after installation\u003c\/strong\u003e – with the help of the appropriate adjustment key.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust material\u003c\/strong\u003e – made of polypropylene and rubber.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable material\u003c\/strong\u003e – the material used is recyclable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight-adjustable pedestals for patio tiles\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen laying patio tiles, \u003cstrong\u003epedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e can be used as support points for the slabs. The MP5 pedestals are designed for raised patio structures with an installation height of \u003cstrong\u003e150 to 270 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe height adjustment makes it possible to adapt the pedestals to the desired height. This allows the height of the individual support points to be set according to the installation surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpacer tabs for stone and ceramic tiles\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals feature spacer tabs for laying patio tiles. Depending on the desired joint width, \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, or 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e options are available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe spacer tabs can be broken off. This allows the pedestals to be used in \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas\u003c\/strong\u003e or adapted for an installation without joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible installation:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThanks to the breakable spacer tabs, the pedestal can be adapted to different installation situations.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight adjustment even after installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA special advantage of the height-adjustable pedestals is the ability to adjust the height even after installation. With the help of the corresponding \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e, the setting of the pedestals can be changed retrospectively.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis facilitates the adjustment of the patio structure and allows for a flexible setting of the height of individual pedestals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePositioning of the pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are simply placed on the intended \u003cstrong\u003einstallation surface\u003c\/strong\u003e. According to the available product specifications, no gluing or additional fastening is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSubsequently, the patio tiles are laid on the designated support points. The exact design of the substructure and the required number of pedestals depend on the respective patio construction and the tiles used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data for the MP5 pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eModel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMP5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eHeight adjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e150 to 270 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eBase diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e195 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eHead diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eBase thickness\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eJoint height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eJoint thickness\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eWeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e480 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eCentral compressive load limit resistance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e19.52 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eLimit resistance for eccentric compressive load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e11.35 kN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial property\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRecyclable material, non-hazardous\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDelivery form\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eScope of delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e36 pieces of pedestals per box\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003ePackaging\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePedestals per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e36 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet variant 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e8 boxes per pallet – approx. 220 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet variant 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 boxes per pallet – approx. 270 cm total height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial and processing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP5 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are made of polypropylene and rubber. According to the available product specifications, the material is recyclable and non-hazardous.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich patios are the pedestals suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe height-adjustable pedestals are designed for \u003cstrong\u003elaying outdoor patio tiles\u003c\/strong\u003e. They can be used for stone and ceramic tiles and, thanks to the various joint thicknesses, offer flexible adaptation to the desired installation method.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a height range of 150 to 270 mm, the pedestals are particularly suitable for patio constructions where a correspondingly increased installation height is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant during planning:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe required number and positioning of the pedestals must be planned according to the patio tiles used, their dimensions, and the respective substructure.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the MP5 pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the height adjustment range of the MP5 pedestals?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMP5 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are height-adjustable from \u003cstrong\u003e150 to 270 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich patio tiles are the pedestals suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are intended for laying \u003cstrong\u003eoutdoor patio tiles\u003c\/strong\u003e. According to the product specifications, they are suitable for stone and ceramic tiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich joint widths are possible?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals feature spacer tabs for \u003cstrong\u003e2, 3, 4, and 5 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e joint thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the spacer tabs be removed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The spacer tabs can be broken off. This allows the pedestals to be adapted for \u003cstrong\u003eedge areas or an installation without joints\u003c\/strong\u003e, for example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the height of the pedestals be changed after installation?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. According to the product specifications, subsequent height adjustment is possible with the help of the appropriate \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment key\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the pedestals made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene and rubber\u003c\/strong\u003e. The material is stated to be recyclable and non-hazardous.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the diameter of the pedestals?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ebase diameter is 195 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The head diameter is 115 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does a pedestal weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the product specifications, one pedestal weighs \u003cstrong\u003e480 g\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow are the pedestals positioned?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pedestals are placed on the intended installation surface. According to the available information, no gluing or additional fastening is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many pedestals are in a box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA box contains \u003cstrong\u003e36 pieces of pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy 150–270 mm pedestals for patio tiles\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e150–270 mm MP5 pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e are a flexible solution for laying outdoor patio tiles. The height adjustment, various joint thicknesses, and breakable spacer tabs allow for adaptation to different installation situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFurther technical information can be found in the detailed data sheet: \u003cbr\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Datenblatt-zu-Terrassenplatten-Stelzlager.pdf?v=1790602749\" title=\"Data sheet for pedestals\"\u003eData sheet for patio tile pedestals as PDF.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eNote:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe information corresponds to the current state of development and does not claim to be exhaustive. Professional and successful processing of the products is beyond our control. A warranty can therefore only be assumed for the quality of the products, but not for the processing. It is the responsibility of the user to determine the suitability of the products for the respective purpose. Preliminary tests are recommended.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c!-- FAQ Schema --\u003e \u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Von welcher bis zu welcher Höhe sind die Stelzlager MP5 verstellbar?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Stelzlager MP5 sind von 150 bis 270 mm höhenverstellbar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Terrassenplatten eignen sich die Stelzlager?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Stelzlager sind für die Verlegung von Terrassenplatten im Aussenbereich vorgesehen. Gemäss den Produktangaben eignen sie sich für Stein- und Keramikplatten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Fugenbreiten sind möglich?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Stelzlager verfügen über Fugenkreuze für 2, 3, 4 und 5 mm Fugenstärke.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Können die Fugenkreuze entfernt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Fugenkreuze lassen sich abbrechen. Dadurch können die Stelzlager beispielsweise für Randbereiche oder eine Verlegung ohne Fugen angepasst werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Höhe der Stelzlager nach der Montage noch verändert werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Gemäss den Produktangaben ist eine nachträgliche Höhenverstellung mit Hilfe des entsprechenden Regulierungsschlüssels möglich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material bestehen die Stelzlager?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Stelzlager werden aus Polypropylen und Gummi hergestellt. Das Material wird als recyclebar und nicht gefährlich angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Durchmesser der Stelzlager?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Basisdurchmesser beträgt 195 mm. Der Kopfdurchmesser beträgt 115 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist ein Stelzlager?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ein Stelzlager hat gemäss den Produktangaben ein Gewicht von 480 g.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156518818139,"sku":"9.552","price":5.08,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stelzlager-fuer-Terrassen-und-Keramikplatten-MP5-scaled.jpg?v=1790088596"},{"product_id":"anpassungsschluessel-fuer-stelzlager","title":"Adjustment key for pedestal supports","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAdjustment Wrench for Adjustable Pedestals\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePractical wrench for height adjustment of adjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e is the suitable tool for simple height adjustment of adjustable pedestals. With this wrench, the corresponding pedestals can be adjusted to set them to the desired height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen installing patio tiles on \u003cstrong\u003eadjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e, precise height adjustment is important. The matching adjustment wrench helps to conveniently change the height of the pedestals and to set the individual support points accordingly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical accessory for adjustable pedestals:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe adjustment wrench was developed for the height adjustment of adjustable pedestals and allows for easy adjustment directly on the pedestal.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe main advantages of the adjustment wrench\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor height adjustment of adjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e – allows the height of the corresponding pedestals to be adjusted.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEasy handling\u003c\/strong\u003e – the wrench serves as a practical tool during assembly and adjustment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust material\u003c\/strong\u003e – made of iron.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical accessory\u003c\/strong\u003e – ideal as a supplement when using adjustable pedestals.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals in patio installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAdjustable pedestals are used when laying patio tiles and allow for the tiles to be laid at an elevation. To ensure the tiles lie at the desired height, the individual pedestals must be adjusted accordingly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a suitable \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e, this height adjustment can be performed directly on the pedestal. This simplifies installation and subsequent adjustment of the height of individual support points.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRobust adjustment wrench made of iron\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustment wrench is made of \u003cstrong\u003eiron\u003c\/strong\u003e and is designed as a practical tool for the height adjustment of adjustable pedestals. It is particularly suitable for work where the height of the pedestals needs to be adjusted during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIron\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight adjustment of adjustable pedestals\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the adjustment wrench suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for users who want to set the height of adjustable pedestals during the assembly of a patio or adjust them subsequently. It is a practical accessory for working with compatible adjustable pedestals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBefore use, it should be checked whether the wrench is suitable for the specific pedestal being used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the adjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\" open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the adjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustment wrench is used for the \u003cstrong\u003eheight adjustment of adjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e. It allows the height of the corresponding pedestals to be adjusted during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\" open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the adjustment wrench made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals is made of \u003cstrong\u003eiron\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\" open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the height of pedestals be adjusted with this wrench?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The adjustment wrench is intended for the \u003cstrong\u003eheight adjustment of adjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e and serves to adjust the height during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\" open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the adjustment wrench suitable for patio installation?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The wrench can be used as a practical accessory during the installation of patios with corresponding adjustable pedestals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\" open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the adjustment wrench compatible with all pedestals?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eGeneral compatibility with all adjustable pedestals cannot be guaranteed. Before purchasing, you should check whether the adjustment wrench is suitable for the pedestal you are using.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy an adjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eadjustment wrench for adjustable pedestals\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical tool for the height adjustment of corresponding pedestals. Made of iron, the wrench supports easy adjustment of the pedestals during the installation of patios and other constructions using pedestal systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlease check the compatibility of the adjustment wrench with the pedestal system used before application.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c!-- FAQ Schema --\u003e \u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür wird der Anpassungsschlüssel für Stelzlager verwendet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Anpassungsschlüssel wird zur Höhenverstellung von Stelzlagern verwendet. Damit lässt sich die Höhe der entsprechenden Stelzlager bei der Montage anpassen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material besteht der Anpassungsschlüssel?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Anpassungsschlüssel für Stelzlager besteht aus Eisen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann mit dem Schlüssel die Höhe von Stelzlagern angepasst werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Anpassungsschlüssel ist für die Höhenverstellung von Stelzlagern vorgesehen und dient zur Anpassung der Höhe während der Montage.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Anpassungsschlüssel für die Terrassenmontage geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Schlüssel kann als praktisches Zubehör bei der Montage von Terrassen mit entsprechenden Stelzlagern eingesetzt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Anpassungsschlüssel mit allen Stelzlagern kompatibel?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Eine allgemeine Kompatibilität mit allen Stelzlagern kann nicht zugesichert werden. Vor dem Kauf sollte geprüft werden, ob der Anpassungsschlüssel für das verwendete Stelzlager geeignet ist.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156528845147,"sku":"9.562","price":24.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Hoehen-verstellbares-Stelzlager-2_4e026b98-2e73-4027-b697-e361ff58cdfe.jpg?v=1790088602"}],"url":"https:\/\/baustore.ch\/en\/collections\/building-material.oembed?page=2","provider":"Baustore.ch","version":"1.0","type":"link"}